System information

ManualsBrandsDLS ManualsComputer equipmentDSS 26

Empowered by Innovation

Software Program Manual

P/N 0913202

Rev 3, May 2008

Printed in U.S.A.

1.0

Technical Support Web Site:

http://www.necux5000.com

Summary of content (1046 pages)

PAGE 1
Empowered by Innovation Software Program Manual P/N 0913202 Rev 3, May 2008 Printed in U.S.A. 1.0 Technical Support Web Site: http://www.necux5000.
PAGE 2
This manual has been developed by NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. It is intended for the use of its customers and service personnel, and should be read in its entirety before attempting to install or program the system. Any comments or suggestions for improving this manual would be appreciated. Forward your remarks to: NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. 4 Forest Parkway Shelton, CT 06484 necunifiedsolutions.
PAGE 3
Table of Contents Introduction to Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Before You Start Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 10-01 : Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 10-02 : Location Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 4
Table of Contents 10-46 : DT700 Server Information Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 10-48 : License Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 10-49 : License File Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 10-50 : License Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 5
Table of Contents Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 13-01 : Abbreviated Dialing Function Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 13-02 : Group Abbreviated Dialing Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 13-03 : Abbreviated Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 13-04 : Abbreviated Dialing Number and Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 6
Table of Contents Program 16 : Department Group Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 16-03 : Secondary Department Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 7
Table of Contents 21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 21-09 : Dial Block Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extensions . . . . . . . .
PAGE 8
Table of Contents Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 24-01 : System Options for Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 24-02 : System Options for Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 24-03 : Park Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 9
Table of Contents 30-04 : Alternate DSS Console Extension Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 30-10 : DSS Console IP Terminal Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Program 31 : Paging Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 10
Table of Contents Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 40-02 : Mailbox Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596 40-03 : Message Recording Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 40-04 : Live Recording Setup . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 11
Table of Contents Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668 44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 12
Table of Contents 51-08 : New Primary System Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 51-09 : CygniLink TCP Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763 51-10 : Remaining Virtual Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765 51-11 : CygniLink System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766 51-12 : Primary System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 13
Table of Contents Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839 84-01 : Codec Information Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839 84-02 : H.225, H.245 Information Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846 84-03 : IP Terminal Information Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849 84-07 : Firmware Download Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 14
Table of Contents 90-19 : Dial Block Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945 90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946 90-21 : Traffic Report Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948 90-22 : NGT Terminal Version Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949 90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Terminals . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 15
Table of Contents 92-05 : Data Swap Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013 92-06 : Fill Extension Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016 92-07 : Delete Port Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018 Program 99 : Manufacturer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021 99-01 : MF Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 16
Table of Contents - For Your Notes - Table of Contents - 14 ◆ UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 17
Introduction to Programming Before You Start Programming Introduction to Programming Before You Start Programming Before Reading This Section This manual provides you with detailed information about the UX5000 programs. By changing a program, you change the way the feature associated with that program works. In this manual, you find out about each program, the features that the program affects and how to enter the program data into UX5000 memory.
PAGE 18
Introduction to Programming Before You Start Programming How to Enter the Programming Mode To enter the programming mode: 1. 2. 3. Go to any working display terminal. In a newly installed UX5000, use extension 301 (port 1). Programming access may be restricted based on the type of program entry used and if other users are connected to the UX5000 for programming purposes. PC Pro: Only one user allowed access to the UX5000 programming at a time.
PAGE 19
Introduction to Programming Before You Start Programming How to Exit the Programming Mode To exit the programming mode: When you are done programming, you must be out of a program’s options to exit (pressing the MIC key will exit the program’s option). 1. Press MIC key to exit the program’s options, if needed. Program Mode Base Service OP1 OP2 2. 3. Press SPK. You see, "Saving System Data". The display shows "Complete Data Save" when completed and will exit the terminal to an idle mode.
PAGE 20
Introduction to Programming Before You Start Programming Using Keys to Move Around in the Programs Once you enter the programming mode, use the keys in the following chart to enter data, edit data and move around in the menus. Keys for Entering Data Use this key... 0-9 and * When you want to . . . Enter data into a program. HOLD Complete the programming step you just made (like pressing Enter on a PC keyboard). When a program entry displays, press HOLD to bypass the entry without changing it.
PAGE 21
Introduction to Programming Before You Start Programming Programming Names and Text Messages Several programs (e.g., Program 20-16: Selectable Display Messages) require you to enter text. Use the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press key “2” three times. Press the key six times display the lower case letter. The name can be up to 12 digits long.
PAGE 22
Introduction to Programming Before You Start Programming Using Soft Keys For Programming Each UX5000 display terminal provides interactive soft keys for intuitive feature access. The options for these keys will automatically change depending on where you are in the UX5000 programming. Simply press the Soft Key located below the option you wish and the display will change accordingly. _ Program Mode Base Service OP1 OP2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Pressing the VOLUME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ will scroll between the menus.
PAGE 23
Introduction to Programming Before You Start Programming Number Plan/Capacities Table 1: System Number Plan/Capacities System Type: UX5000 Capacity System Analog Caller ID Detector 64 Classes of Service 15 Conference Bridge Groups 4 Day/Night Mode Numbers 8 Day/Night Service Patterns 32 Dial Tone Detector DTMF Receiver 48 or 64 w/EXIFU-B1 Mounted Network Nodes: • CygniLink • AspireNet System Ports (trunks and analog/digital/IP extensions) 16 50 200 trunks and 512 extensions * Chassis must be
PAGE 24
Introduction to Programming Before You Start Programming Table 1: System Number Plan/Capacities System Type: UX5000 Capacity TLIU: • Physical Ports • Logical Ports 01-04 0-200 VOIPDB: • Physical Ports • Logical Ports 001-128 0-200 DID Translation Tables 20 DID Translation Table Entries 2000 DISA • Classes of Service • Users 15 1-15 Ring Groups 1-100 Tie Line Classes of Service 15 Tie Line Toll Restriction Classes 15 Trunk Access Maps 1-200 Trunk Group Numbers 1-100 Trunk Routes 1-100
PAGE 25
Introduction to Programming Before You Start Programming Table 1: System Number Plan/Capacities System Type: UX5000 Capacity Virtual Extension Ports 256 Virtual Extension Port Numbers 001-256 Virtual Extension Number Range Undefined 2PGDAD Modules ADA (Recording Jack) Adapters 512 512 (104 max.
PAGE 26
Introduction to Programming Before You Start Programming Table 1: System Number Plan/Capacities System Type: UX5000 Capacity Abbreviated Dialing Abbreviated Dialing Groups Abbreviated Dialing Bins Abbreviated Dialing Table-Common 64 0-1999 1000 ACD ACD Groups 64 ACD Agent Extensions 512 ACI ACI Groups 16 ACI Ports 96 Automated Attendant VRS Message Numbers 1-100 Bluetooth Adapters BCH - Bluetooth Cordless Handset 16 BHA - Bluetooth Hub Adapter 16 Conference Conference Circuits 64 - maximu
PAGE 27
Introduction to Programming Before You Start Programming Table 1: System Number Plan/Capacities System Type: UX5000 Capacity Hotline Internal Hotline 512 External Hotline 512 Paging and Park Internal Page Group Numbers 0, 1-9 or 01-64 External Page Group Numbers 0, 1-8 External Speakers • CCPU • PGDAD Module 9 (1) (1-8) Park Group Numbers 1-64 Park Orbits 1-64 Power Failure Adapters PSA (Power Failure) Adapters • • • • • 16 (9.
PAGE 28
Introduction to Programming Before You Start Programming Table 1: System Number Plan/Capacities System Type: UX5000 Capacity VoIP VoIP Extensions 512 Gigabit Adapters 512 IP Phones 512 RAS Unicast Ports 0-65535 Call Signaling Ports 0-65535 NGT Signal Receive Ports 0-65535 IP Call Procedure Port 0-65535 H.323 Alias Addresses 1-6 Note: Extension numbers can be three or four digits long. See Flexible System Numbering.
PAGE 29
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-01 : Time and Date Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-01 : Time and Date Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 10-01 : Time and Date to change the UX5000 Time and Date through UX5000 programming. Extension users can also dial Service Code 828 to change the Time if allowed by an extension’s Class of Service. Input Data Item No. Item Input data Default 01 Year 00-99 No setting Enter two digits for year (00-99).
PAGE 30
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-01 : Time and Date Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-01 (Time and Date): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 01 10-01-01 Year back ↑ 3. ← 14 ◆ Programming select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-01-nn nnnnn 4. 5. ↓ → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 31
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-02 : Location Setup 10-02 : Location Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 10-02 : Location Setup to define the location of the installed UX5000. Input Data Item No. Item Input data Default Description 01 Country Code Dial (up to 4 digits): 0-9, *, # 1 Enter the country code. 02 International Access Code Dial (up to 4 digits): 0-9, *, # - Enter the international access code.
PAGE 32
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-02 : Location Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-02 (Location Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 02 10-02-01 Country_Code back ↑ ↓ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 16 ◆ Programming select → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 33
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-03 : Blade Setup 10-03 : Blade Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-03 : Blade Setup to setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data for each blade. When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to ‘0’ and then plug the new device in to have the UX5000 automatically define it or you may have to reseat the blade. Note: The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.
PAGE 34
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-03 : Blade Setup 03 Additional Data This option is reserved for future use. 3 = Not used 4 = Not used 01-16 (port number) A port number is automatically set as the order which the terminal started.
PAGE 35
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-03 : Blade Setup B-Channel 2 Item No.
PAGE 36
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-03 : Blade Setup For SLIU Blade Physical Port Number Item No. 01-16 Item Input Data Default 0-256 0 01 Logical Port Number 02 Not used 03 Transmit Gain Level (S-Level) 1-63 (-15.5 +15.5dB) 32 (0dB) 04 Receive Gain Level (R-Level) 1-63 (-15.5 +15.5dB) 32 (0dB) For 082U Digital/SLT Combination Blade - INDEX-1 Physical Port Number 01-14 Program Data: Refer to the ESIU, SLIU, COIU, or BRIU descriptions.
PAGE 37
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-03 : Blade Setup For TLIU Blade Physical Port Number Item No. Item 01-04 Input Data Default 0-200 0 01 Logical Port Number 02 2/4Wire 0 = 2Wire 1 = 4Wire 1 03 E&M Line Control Method M-Lead Type 0 = Type I 1 = Type V 1 For BRIU Blade ISDN Line Number Item No. 01-04 Item Input Data Default 01 ISDN Line Mode 0 = No Setting 1 = T-Bus 2 = S-Bus Options 3-5 determines the clock source for the networked connection.
PAGE 38
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-03 : Blade Setup 05 CLIP Information Announcement Based on this setting, the UX5000 will include a “Presentation Allowed” (1) or “Presentation Restricted” (0) in the Setup message to allow or deny the Calling Party Number. Program 15-01-04 must also be set to a ‘1’ if this option is enabled.
PAGE 39
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-03 : Blade Setup 18 Type of Number Use this option to define the ISDN numbering plan to allow the calling party information to be passed to some telcos. Within QSIG networks, a private number plan may be used and announced in the Called Party Number and Calling Party Number information elements by the Number Plan Indicator 9 (binary 1001). This can be set in Programs 10-03-18 and 10-03-19.
PAGE 40
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-03 : Blade Setup For PRIU Blade Item No.
PAGE 41
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-03 : Blade Setup Item No.
PAGE 42
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-03 : Blade Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 21 Number of Ports 0 = Auto 1 = 4 Ports 2 = 8 Ports 3 = 12 Ports 4 = 16 Ports 5 = 20 Ports 0 22 QSIG Operation Mode If the UX5000 is attached to a QSIG network, enable this option. The ISDN lines will be marked in the UX5000 data by a new flag to indicate the length of the call reference value. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 23 Straight Wiring 0 = Auto 1 = Manual (Cross) 2 = Manual (Straight) 0 Note 1.
PAGE 43
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-03 : Blade Setup For T1 Blade Item No.
PAGE 44
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-03 : Blade Setup For VOIPDB - INDEX-1 Physical Port Number Item No. Item 01 Trunk Logical Port Number 02 H.323 or SIP Trunk Determine the IP trunk type setup. If SIP trunking is used, this reduces the number of ports on the VOIPDB card which can be used for UX5000 IP terminals or IP CygniLink. With SIP trunking, some ports must be defined for SIP. 001-128 Input Data Default 0-200 0 0 = H.
PAGE 45
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-04 : Music on Hold Setup 10-04 : Music on Hold Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-04 : Music on Hold Setup to set the Music on Hold selection. For MOH, the UX5000 can provide silence to callers on Hold or one of eleven synthesized selections. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 46
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-04 : Music on Hold Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-04 (Music on Hold Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 04 10-04-01 Hold Music Set 0:Internal back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 30 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 47
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup 10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup to define which Relay circuits (5-8) on 2PGDAD Adapter are used for General Purpose Relay. Refer to Program 10-21-01 for the CCPU relay. Input Data - INDEX-1 General Purpose Relay No. Item No.
PAGE 48
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-05 (General Purpose Relay Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 05 10-05-01 Relay No1 Slot No =back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-05-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 32 ◆ Programming Relay No − + → Select the relay number to be programmed or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 49
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-06 : ISDN BRI Setup 10-06 : ISDN BRI Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-06 : ISDN BRI Setup to define the TEI selection and DID mode for DID callers when the BRI feature is used. Enter the SPID (Service Profile ID) assigned to each of the UX5000’s BRI ISDN lines. Each BRI blade has a maximum of two lines and each line can have a maximum of two SPIDs.
PAGE 50
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-06 : ISDN BRI Setup Feature Cross Reference ● ISDN Compatibility Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-06 (ISDN BRI Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 06 10-06-01 Slot No 1 BRI 1 TEI 0:SPID back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-06-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 34 ◆ Programming Slot No − + n → Select the slot number to be programmed or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 51
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-07 : Conversation Record Circuits 10-07 : Conversation Record Circuits Level: Feature Availability IN • Available - 64 channels (on the CPU) maximum. Description Use Program 10-07 : Conversation Record Circuits to select the number of Conference circuits to be used for Conversation Recording. Note: Even if this program is set to ‘0’, the telephone conversation recording function can be used.
PAGE 52
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-07 : Conversation Record Circuits Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-07 (Conversation Record Circuits): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 07 10-07-01 No.of Record 0 back ↑ ↓ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-07-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 36 ◆ Programming select → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 53
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup 10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup to enable or disable pre-ringing for trunk calls. This sets how a trunk initially rings a terminal. With pre-ringing, a burst of ringing occurs as soon as the trunk’s LED flashes. The call then continues ringing with the normal ring cadence cycle.
PAGE 54
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup 10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup to allocate the circuits on the CPU blades for either DTMF receiving or dial tone detection. The CCPU blade has 32 circuits initially. On the UX5000, with an EXIFU installed, an additional 64 circuits are provided.
PAGE 55
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-09 (DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 09 10-09-01 Resource1 DTMF DT Detect1:Intercom back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-09-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. − Resource1 + → Enter the resource number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 56
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-12 : CCPU Network Setup 10-12 : CCPU Network Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 10-12 : CCPU Network Setup to setup the IP Address, Subnet-Mask, and Default Gateway addresses of the CCPU and EXIFU. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data 01 IP Address Set the IP address for the CCPU. 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 -191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.
PAGE 57
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-12 : CCPU Network Setup 07 Default Gateway (WAN Side) IP Address Set the Default Gateway’s IP Address. With SIP trunking, the IP address of the WAN side of the router must be entered. 0.0.0.0 - 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 - 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 - 223.225.225.254 08 ICMP Redirect When the UX5000 receives the ICMP REDIRECT message, determine whether the IP routing table is automatically updated.
PAGE 58
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-12 : CCPU Network Setup Feature Cross Reference ● VoIP Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-12 (CPU Network Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 12 10-12-01 IP_Add 172.16 .0 .10 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-12-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 42 ◆ Programming Slot No. n → Enter the slot number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 59
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup 10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup to setup the DHCP Server built into the CPU. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 DHCP Server Mode 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 0 02 Lease Time PCPro/WebPro provides a maintenance function to display the extension number, MAC address, IP address and expiration date of a lease.
PAGE 60
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-13 (In-DHCP Server Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 13 10-13-01 DCHP-Serv_Mode0:Off back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-13-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 44 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 61
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-14 : Managed Network Setup 10-14 : Managed Network Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 10-14 : Managed Network Setup to set up the range of the IP address which the DHCP Server leases to a client. Input Data Item No. Description 01 The range of the IP address to lease. When “Maximum” has not been entered, the maximum value equals the minimum value. Input Data Default Minimum: 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.
PAGE 62
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-14 : Managed Network Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-14 (Managed Network Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 14 10-14-01 Min 172.16 .0 .100 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-14-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 46 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 63
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-15 : Client Information Setup 10-15 : Client Information Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 10-15 : Client Information Setup to set up the client information when the DHCP server needs to assign a fixed IP address to clients. Input Data Client Number 1-512 Item No. Description Input Data Default 01 MAC Address The IP address should be assigned out of the scope range set up in Program 10-14.
PAGE 64
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-15 : Client Information Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-15 (Client Information Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 15 10-15-01 Client1 MAC 00-00-00-00-00-00 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-15-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 48 ◆ Programming Clientn − + → Enter the client number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 65
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-16 : Option Information Setup 10-16 : Option Information Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 10-16 : Option Information Setup to set up the option given from the DHCP server to each client. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Router Input Data Code number 0-255 IP address 1.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 02 DNS Server Code number 0-255 IP address 1.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.
PAGE 66
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-16 : Option Information Setup 09 10 11 12 13 Encryption Account Information Set the encryption account information used with AutoConfig. FTP Server Address Set the FTP server address used with AutoConfig. Without the Config file and a proper FTP server, a Chinese character terminal cannot be registered. Set to 0.0.0.0 when you are not registerng a Chinese character terminal with the FTP server.
PAGE 67
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-16 : Option Information Setup 18 19 20 External FTP Server for IPterm85 Set the FTP server address used with AutoConf (ITR-32K). Code number 0-255 141 (Fixed) IP Address: 0.0.0.0 = 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 = 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 = 223.255.255.254 Config File Name Enter the File Name used for AutoConfig.
PAGE 68
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-16 : Option Information Setup 26 XML Server - Future Item - Code number 0-255 43 (Fixed) Sub Code number 167 (Fixed) IP Address: 0.0.0.0 = 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 = 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 = 223.255.255.254 27 SIP Server Receive Port Code number 0-255 Port: 1-65535 0.0.0.0 168 (Fixed) 5080 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● VoIP Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-16 (Option Information Setup): 1. 2.
PAGE 69
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup 10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup to define the H.323 Gatekeeper. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Input Data Gatekeeper mode 0:No GK 1:Automatic 2:Manual Default 0 Related Program Description An external gatekeeper uses proprietary set up.
PAGE 70
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-17 (H.323 Gatekeeper Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 17 10-17-01 GK_Mode back ↑ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-17-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 54 ◆ Programming 0:None select ↓ → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 71
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup 10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup to set up the Alias Address registered into the External Gatekeeper. Input Data The number of alias Item No. Item 1-6 Input Data Default Description 01 Alias Address Maximum 12 digits (0-9, *, #) No setup Define the Alias Address of the UX5000 registered into the External Gatekeeper.
PAGE 72
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-18 (H.323 Alias Address Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 18 10-18-01 Alias 1 Alias_Add back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-18-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 56 ◆ Programming Alias n − + → Enter the Alias number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 73
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-19 : VOIPDB DSP Resource Selection 10-19 : VOIPDB DSP Resource Selection Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-19 : VOIPDB DSP Resource Selection to specify the operating mode of the DSP resource on the VOIPDB daughter board. This program setting has no affect on the terminal/ trunk port assignments or usage. Input Data - INDEX-1 Slot Number 1, 4 Physical Port Number 001-128 - INDEX-2 - Item No.
PAGE 74
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-19 : VOIPDB DSP Resource Selection Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-19 (VOIPDB DSP Resource Selection): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 19 10-19-01 Slot No 1 DSP01_Oper.Mode0:ICM/TRK back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-19-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 58 ◆ Programming − + → Enter the slot number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 75
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment 10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment to define the TCP port/address/etc. for communicating to external equipment.
PAGE 76
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-20 (LAN Setup for External Equipment): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 20 10-20-01 Ex-Device1 TCP_Port 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-20-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 60 ◆ Programming − + → Enter the device number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 77
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-21 : CCPU Hardware Setup 10-21 : CCPU Hardware Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-21 : CCPU Hardware Setup to set up various hardware, such as the external speaker, BGM, and the switch for control on CCPU. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 78
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-21 : CCPU Hardware Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-21 (CCPU Hardware Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 21 10-21-04 Ext Srv Select0:SPK/MOH back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-21-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 62 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 79
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-22 : Setting the Wake On LAN for APSU 10-22 : Setting the Wake On LAN for APSU Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 10-22 : Setting the Wake On LAN for APSU to set up the data required to start the APSU unit (server) from a key terminal. Input Data SLOT Number Item No. Item Input Data 01 Server MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF 02 Broadcast address 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.
PAGE 80
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-22 : Setting the Wake On LAN for APSU Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-22 (Setting the Wake On LAN for APSU): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 22 10-22-01 Slot No 1 SVR MAC00-00-00-00-00-00 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-22-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 64 ◆ Programming Slot No − + n → Enter the slot number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 81
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-23 : H.323 System Interconnection 10-23 : H.323 System Interconnection Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 10-23 : H.323 System Interconnection to define the IP address of another system, call control port number and alias address for UX5000 inter-connection. This program is activated when Program 10-17-01 and 10-18 are registered. The UX5000 allows for up to 1000 systems to be registered.
PAGE 82
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-23 : H.323 System Interconnection Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-23 (H.323 System Interconnection): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 23 10-23-01 System No.1 Sys Interconnect 0:No back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-23-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 66 ◆ Programming System No.nn − + → Enter the system number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 83
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup 10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup to set the options for daylight savings. As the UX5000 is used globally, these settings define when the UX5000 should automatically adjust for daylight savings as it applies to the region in which the UX5000 is installed. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 84
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup 08 End of Week Day Enter the day of the week the UX5000 should adjust the time for daylight savings time (01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday, etc). 1-7 (Sun=1, Mon=2, etc.) 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Time and Date Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-24 (Daylight Savings Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 24 10-24-01 Daylight Saving 1:On back ↑ ↓ select 3.
PAGE 85
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup 10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup to set the gateway prefix registered to the outside gatekeeper. Input Data Item No. Item 01 Gateway Prefix Registration Determine whether the Gateway Prefix is registered in an external Gatekeeper.
PAGE 86
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-25 (H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 25 10-25-01 Prefix Reg. 0:Disable back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-25-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 70 ◆ Programming −1 +1 → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 87
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-26 : IP System Operation Setup 10-26 : IP System Operation Setup Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 10-26 : IP System Operation Setup to set the operation mode of the IP communications server. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 IP Peer-to-Peer This options allows a IP terminal to call another IP terminal user without using DSP resources on the VOIPDB daughter board.
PAGE 88
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-26 : IP System Operation Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-26 (IP System Operation Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 26 10-26-01 Peer to Peer back ↑ 3. ← 72 ◆ Programming 1:On select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-26-nn nnnnn 4. 5. ↓ −1 +1 → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 89
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-27 : IP System ID 10-27 : IP System ID Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 10-27 : IP System ID to set the IP address of the networked IP systems. Input Data System ID 01-50 Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 IP Address System ID is related with the System ID in the Numbering Plan (Program 11-01-03).
PAGE 90
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-27 : IP System ID Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-27 (IP System ID): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 27 10-27-01 SysID1 IP Add 0 .0 .0 .0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-27-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 74 ◆ Programming − SysIDnn + → Enter the system ID number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 91
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-28 : SIP Trunk Basic Setup 10-28 : SIP Trunk Basic Setup Level: SA Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 10-28 : SIP Trunk Basic Setup to set the basic options used for SIP trunks. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Domain Name Define the Domain name. This information is generally provided by the SIP carrier. 64 characters maximum None 02 Host Name Define the Host name.
PAGE 92
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-28 : SIP Trunk Basic Setup Feature Cross Reference VoIP Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-28 (SIP Trunk Basic Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 28 10-28-01 Domain Name back ↑ 3. ← 76 ◆ Programming select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-28-nn nnnnn 4. 5. ↓ → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 93
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-29 : SIP Proxy Setup 10-29 : SIP Proxy Setup Level: SA Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 10-29 : SIP Proxy Setup to set the proxy options for SIP trunks. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 SIP Proxy Setup - Default Outbound Proxy Define the SIP Proxy setup, Default Proxy (Outbound). When SIP trunking is used, this must be on.
PAGE 94
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-29 : SIP Proxy Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 0-65535 5060 10-29-05 0=off, 1=on 0 07 Registration Server Trans Port Define the Registration Trans. port. This item is only used when Program 10-29-05 is set to “Manual”. 08 DNS Server Mode Define the DNS Mode. If the SIP carrier provides a domain name, turn this option on.
PAGE 95
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-29 : SIP Proxy Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference VoIP Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-29 (SIP Proxy Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 29 10-29-01 Dflt.Proxy(0B) back ↑ 3. 0:OFF select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-29-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. ↓ −1 +1 → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 96
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-30 : SIP Authentication Information 10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-30 : SIP Authentication Information to set the authentication options for SIP trunks. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 - Not Used - 02 User ID Define the authentication User name provided by the SIP carrier.
PAGE 97
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-30 (SIP Authentication Information): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 30 10-30-02 User Name back ↑ 3. select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-30-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. ↓ → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 98
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-31 : Networking Keep Alive Setup 10-31 : Networking Keep Alive Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-31 : Networking Keep Alive Setup to set the interval and retry count of the AspireNet networking keep alive message. The keep alive is used for ISDN and IP networking. The keep alive message is automatically responded to by the destination UX5000, if the response is not received the retry count will start.
PAGE 99
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-31 : Networking Keep Alive Setup Conditions The keep alive message must be sent and a response not received for the retry count, for the link to be taken out of service and the calls in progress and Park Hold orbits to be released. For example: If an ISDN CygniLink connection is disconnected at Layer 1 then the keep alive message can not be sent, therefore the keep alive operation will not occur.
PAGE 100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-32 : PRI Networking Channel Limitation 10-32 : PRI Networking Channel Limitation Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-32 : PRI Networking Channel Limitation to assign the number of B-channels to be used for each ISDN blade. This allows for fractional PRIs when used with multiple site networking.
PAGE 101
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-32 : PRI Networking Channel Limitation Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-32 (PRI Networking Channel Limitation): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 32 10-32-01 Slot No 1 Max Chan. 23 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-32-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. − Slot No + 1 → Enter the slot number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 102
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Setup 10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Setup to set the registrar/proxy options for SIP extensions. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Registration Expire Time This timer sets the interval Keep Alive time is checked, unless provided by the SIP terminals.
PAGE 103
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-33 (SIP Registrar/Proxy Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 33 10-33-01 Expire Time back ↑ 3. select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-33-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. ↓ → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 104
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup 10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup to set the SIP trunk registration information. The UX5000 can keep 31 Registrations. Data in programs 10-28-04, 10-30-02 and 10-30-03 are recognized as ID 0. This UX5000 data is for register ID 1 - ID 31.
PAGE 105
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-36 (SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 36 10-36-01 RegisterID1 Registration 0:Disable back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-36-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. − RegisterIDnn + → Enter the register ID number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 106
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-37 : UPnP Setup 10-37 : UPnP Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-37 : UPnP Setup to set the UPnP options for SIP trunks. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 UPnP Mode Use this option to determine whether UPnP task starts. If UPnP task starts, it obtains a NAPT router WAN IP Address by using NAT traversal and saves it in 10-12-07 automatically.
PAGE 107
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-37 : UPnP Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-37 (UPnP Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 37 10-37-01 UPnP Mode back ↑ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-37-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 0:Disable select ↓ −1 +1 → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 108
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-39 : T1/PRI Fractional Setup 10-39 : T1/PRI Fractional Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-39 : T1/PRI Fractional Setup to determine if the T1/PRI should allow the use fractional ports. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Fractional Use Use this option to determine whether the UX5000 should allow fractional use of T1/PRI trunks.
PAGE 109
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-40 : IP Trunk Availability 10-40 : IP Trunk Availability Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 10-40 : IP Trunk Availability to determine whether SIP trunks are enabled. Input Data Slot Number Item No. Item 1 Input Data Default Related Program 84-26 01 IP Trunk Availability Select whether to enable or disable the use of IP trunks. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 02 Number of Ports Define the number of IP trunks.
PAGE 110
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-40 : IP Trunk Availability Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-40 (IP Trunk Availability): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 40 10-40-01 Slot No. n SIP TRUNK 0:Disable back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-40-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 94 ◆ Programming − Slot No. + n → Enter the slot number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 111
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-41 : General Purpose Contact Detector Setup 10-41 : General Purpose Contact Detector Setup Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 10-41 : General Purpose Contact Detector Setup to specify the circuit number used on a 2PGDAD as a contact detection circuit. Input Data General Purpose Contact Detector Number Item No.
PAGE 112
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-41 : General Purpose Contact Detector Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-41 (General Purpose Contact Detector Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 41 10-41-01 Detector No. n Slot Num 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-41-nn Detector No. nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 96 ◆ Programming − + n → Enter the slot number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 113
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting 10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting to define the parameters of the Virtual Loop Back port as used with ISDN. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 0-23 (0=No setting) 0 Related Program 01 Number of Loop Back Ports Define the number of Virtual Loop Back ports.
PAGE 114
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting Feature Cross Reference ISDN Compatibility Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-42 (Virtual Loop Back Port Setting): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 42 10-42-01 Loopback Port 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-42-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 98 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 115
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup 10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup to setup the IP routing table with IP Addresses, Subnet-Masks, and Gateway addresses. Input Data Routing Table Number 001-100 Item No. Item 01 Network IP Address Set the network IP address for routing the packets sent by LAN to the CCPU. 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 -191.255.255.254 192.0.
PAGE 116
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-45 (IP Routing Table Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 45 10-45-01 IP_Add 0.0 .0 .0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-45-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 100 ◆ Programming → Enter the Route Table number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 117
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-46 : DT700 Server Information Setup 10-46 : DT700 Server Information Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-46 : DT700 Server Information Setup to define the settings for the DT700 Server. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 0 = Plug and Play 1 = Auto 2 = Manual 0 Related Program 01 Register Mode Set the type of terminal registration mode of the DT700 terminal.
PAGE 118
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-46 : DT700 Server Information Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 11 Multicast IP Address Set the internet protocol address used by the Multicast. Multicast IP address cannot overlap when two or more main devices are set up in the same network communications server or if multicast is used by other IP services. 224.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255 224.0.0.10 12 Beginning Multicast Port Set the beginning port number used by the multicast.
PAGE 119
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-46 : DT700 Server Information Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-46 (SIP Multi-Line Server Information Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 46 10-46-01 Regist Mode 0:Plug Play back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-46-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 120
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup 10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup to define the settings for the Terminal License Server. Input Data Item No. Item 01 Reception Port for TCP I/F Set the TCP message reception port number. 02 TCP Keep Alive Time Define the TCP keep alive time.
PAGE 121
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-48 : License Activation 10-48 : License Activation Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-48 : License Activation to enable the license from the License Server. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data 01 Software Code 20 Digits Max. 02 Activation Code 8 Hexadecimal Digits 03 Feature Code Default Related Program 7 Digits Max.
PAGE 122
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-49 : License File Activation 10-49 : License File Activation Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-49 : License File Activation to preserve the file issued from the license server in the USB thumb drive, and turns on a formal license from the USB thumb drive. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 123
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-50 : License Information 10-50 : License Information Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-50 : License Information to display the License Server information. This program is read-only. Input Data Feature Code Number Item No.
PAGE 124
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-50 : License Information Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-50 (License Information): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 50 10-50-01 License No.0 Name back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-50-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 108 ◆ Programming → Enter the license number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 125
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection for 1PRIU Blade 10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection for 1PRIU Blade Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection for 1PRIU Blade is used to selection the function of an installed 1PRIU blade - PRI or T1. Input Data System ID 0-50 Slot Number 01-24 Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 PRI/T1 Selection Select if the 1PRIU blade is to be used for PRI (0) or T1 (1).
PAGE 126
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection for 1PRIU Blade Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-51 (PRI/T1 Selection of PRIU Blade): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 51 10-51-01 Slot No 1 PRI/T1 Selection 0:PRI back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-51-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 110 ◆ Programming Slot No 1 → Enter the slot number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 127
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-52 : Free/Demo License Information 10-52 : Free/Demo License Information Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-52 : Free/Demo License Information is used to display the remaining number of days available for free/demo licenses. This program is read-only. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Free/Demo License Days Remaining This option will display the number of days remaining on a free/demo license.
PAGE 128
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-54 : License Configuration for Blades 10-54 : License Configuration for Blades Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-54 : License Configuration for Blades to set the licensing details for each blade. Input Data Slot Number 01-24 License Index Number 01-32 Item No.
PAGE 129
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-54 : License Configuration for Blades Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-54 (License Configuration for Blades): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 54 10-54-01 Slot No 1 ID01LicenseCode back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-54-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 7. Slot No 1 → Enter the slot number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 130
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-55 : UX5000 Blade Network Setup 10-55 : UX5000 Blade Network Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-55 : UX5000 Blade Network Setup to set the SPOE (single point of entry) for each blade. Input Data Slot Number 01-24 Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 IP Address Enter an IP address for each blade in the UX5000. 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 -191.255.255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 Slot 1 = 172.16.1.
PAGE 131
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-55 : UX5000 Blade Network Setup Feature Cross Reference ● Networking - AspireNet Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-55 (UX5000 Blade Network Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 55 10-55-01 Slot No 1 IP Add 172.16 .1 .100 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-55-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 7. Slot No n → Enter the slot number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 132
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-56 : XML Portal Page for IP Terminal 10-56 : XML Portal Page for IP Terminal Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 10-56 : XML Portal Page for IP Terminal to set the licensing details for each blade. Input Data XML Application URL Link Item No. Item 1-5 Input Data Default 01 XML Application Name Use this option to set the XML application name. Up to 40 Characters Max. - 02 URL Set the URL for the XML application.
PAGE 133
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-56 : XML Portal Page for IP Terminal Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 10-56 (XML Portal Page for IP Terminal): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 56 10-56-01 Name ← 3. − + → Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-56-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. URL Link1 URL Linkn → Enter the URL number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 134
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup 10-56 : XML Portal Page for IP Terminal - For Your Notes - 118 ◆ Programming UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 135
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-01 : System Numbering Program 11 : System Numbering 11-01 : System Numbering Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 11-01 : System Numbering to set the UX5000’s internal (Intercom) numbering plan. The numbering plan assigns the first and second digits dialed and affects the digits an extension user must dial to access other extensions and features, such as service codes and trunk codes.
PAGE 136
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-01 : System Numbering Step 2: Specify the length of the code you want to change After you specify a single or two digit code, you must tell the UX5000 how many digits comprise the code. This is the Number of Digits Required column in the System Numbering (page 122) table. In the default program, all codes from 100-999 are three digits long. Codes beginning with 0 are one digit long. Codes beginning with * are 3 digits long and codes beginning with # are 4 digits long.
PAGE 137
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-01 : System Numbering ● Changing the Dial Type for a range of codes can have a dramatic affect on how your UX5000 operates. Assume, for example, the site is a hotel that has room numbers from 100-399. In order to make extension numbers correspond to room numbers, you should: - Change the Dial Type for the digit 1 from 1 (Service Code) to 2 (extension number). - Change the Dial Type for the digit 7 from 2 (extension number) to 1 (Service Code).
PAGE 138
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-01 : System Numbering System Numbering Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Individual Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 8=Networking, 0=Not Used Dialed Number Number of Digits Required Default New Dial Type Default New 1X 3 1 11 0 0 12 0 0 13 0 0 14 0 0 15 0 0 16 0 0 17 0 0 18 0 0 19 0 0 10 0 0 1* 0 0 1# 0 0 2X 3 2 21 0 0 22 0 0 23 0 0 24 0 0 25 0 0 26 0 0 27 0
PAGE 139
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-01 : System Numbering System Numbering Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Individual Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 8=Networking, 0=Not Used Dialed Number Number of Digits Required Default New Dial Type Default New 3X 3 2 31 0 0 32 0 0 33 0 0 34 0 0 35 0 0 36 0 0 37 0 0 38 0 0 39 0 0 30 0 0 3* 0 0 3# 0 0 4X 3 2 41 0 0 42 0 0 43 0 0 44 0 0 45 0 0 46 0 0 47 0
PAGE 140
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-01 : System Numbering System Numbering Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Individual Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 8=Networking, 0=Not Used Dialed Number Number of Digits Required Default New Dial Type Default New 5X 4 2 51 0 0 52 0 0 53 0 0 54 0 0 55 0 0 56 0 0 57 0 0 58 0 0 59 0 0 50 0 0 5* 0 0 5# 0 0 6X 3 2 61 0 0 62 0 0 63 0 0 64 0 0 65 0 0 66 0 0 67 0
PAGE 141
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-01 : System Numbering System Numbering Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Individual Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 8=Networking, 0=Not Used Dialed Number Number of Digits Required Default New Dial Type Default New 7X 3 2 71 0 0 72 0 0 73 0 0 74 0 0 75 0 0 76 0 0 77 0 0 78 0 0 79 0 0 70 0 0 7* 0 0 7# 0 0 8X 3 1 81 0 0 82 0 0 83 0 0 84 0 0 85 0 0 86 0 0 87 0
PAGE 142
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-01 : System Numbering System Numbering Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Individual Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 8=Networking, 0=Not Used Dialed Number Number of Digits Required Default New Dial Type Default New 9X 1 3 91 0 0 92 0 0 93 0 0 94 0 0 95 0 0 96 0 0 97 0 0 98 0 0 99 0 0 90 0 0 9* 0 0 9# 0 0 0X 1 5 01 0 0 02 0 0 03 0 0 04 0 0 05 0 0 06 0 0 07 0
PAGE 143
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-01 : System Numbering System Numbering Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Individual Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 8=Networking, 0=Not Used Dialed Number Number of Digits Required Default New Dial Type Default New *X 2 1 *1 0 0 *2 0 0 *3 0 0 *4 0 0 *5 0 0 *6 0 0 *7 0 0 *8 0 0 *9 0 0 *0 0 0 ** 0 0 *# 0 0 #X 0 0 #1 2 1 #2 2 1 #3 2 1 #4 2 1 #5 2 1 #6 2 1 #7 2
PAGE 144
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-01 : System Numbering Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Flexible System Numbering Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 11-01 (System Numbering): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 11 01 11-01-01 Dial 1 1x Digit 3 back ↑ ↓ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 11-01-nn Dial n nnnnn Digit nn ← 4. 5. 6. 128 ◆ Programming select → Enter the dial number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 145
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-02 : Extension Numbering 11-02 : Extension Numbering Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 11-02 : Extension Numbering to set the extension number. The extension number can be up to eight digits long. The first/second digit(s) of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01. This lets an employee move to a new location (port) and retain the same extension number. Input Data Extension Port Number Item No.
PAGE 146
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-02 : Extension Numbering Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 11-02 (Extension Numbering): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 11 02 11-02-01 Extn Port1 Extension_No. 301 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 11-02-nn Extn Portnnn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 130 ◆ Programming − + → Enter the extension port number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 147
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering 11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering to define the virtual extension numbers. The extension number can be up to eight digits long. The first/second digit(s) of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01. Input Data Virtual Extension Port Numbers Item No.
PAGE 148
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 11-04 (Virtual Extension Numbering): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 11 04 11-04-01 V-Port 1 Virtual_Ext_No. back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 11-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 132 ◆ Programming V-Port nnn − + → Enter the virtual port number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 149
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering 11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering to define the virtual extension number to be used for the ACI. The extension number can be up to eight digits long. The first/second digit(s) of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01. Input Data ACI Port Number 01-96 Item No.
PAGE 150
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 11-06 (ACI Extension Numbering): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 11 06 11-06-01 ACI Port1 ACI_Ext_No. back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 11-06-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 134 ◆ Programming ACI Portnnn − + → Enter the ACI port number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 151
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers 11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers to assign pilot numbers to each Department Group set up in Program 16-02. The pilot number is the number users dial for Department Calling and Department Step Calling. The pilot number can be up to eight digits long.
PAGE 152
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 11-07 (Department Group Pilot Numbers): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 11 07 11-07-01 TEL Group1 Pilot_Call_No. back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 11-07-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 136 ◆ Programming TEL Groupnnn − + → Enter the telephone group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 153
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number 11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number to assign the pilot number to the ACI Groups set in Program 33-02. The pilot number can be up to four digits long. The first/second digit(s) of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 as type 2. Input Data ACI Group Number Item No.
PAGE 154
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 11-08 (ACI Group Pilot Number): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 11 08 11-08-01 ACI Group1 ACI_Pilot_No. back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 11-08-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 138 ◆ Programming ACI Groupnnn − + → Enter the ACI group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 155
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-09 : Trunk Access Code 11-09 : Trunk Access Code Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 11-09 : Trunk Access Code to assign the trunk access code (normally 9). The trunk access code can be set from 1 to 8 digits which is defined to type 3 and 4 in Program 11-01. This is the code extension users dial to access Automatic Route Selection. The Individual Trunk Access Code is used when Trunk Group Routing is desired for an outgoing line.
PAGE 156
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-09 : Trunk Access Code Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 11-09 (Trunk Access Code): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 11 09 11-09-01 Trunk_Access_Code0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 11-09-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 140 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 157
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) to customize the Service Codes for the System Administrator. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-11 through 11-16. The following chart shows: ● The number of each code (01-27) ● The function of the Service Code.
PAGE 158
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) Item No.
PAGE 159
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) Item No. Item Terminals Default 38 - Not Used - - - 39 - Not Used - - - 40 - Not Used - - - 41 Date Setting Define the service code used to manually change the date for the UX5000 (service code + YY/MM/DD/W [W is the day of the week: Sun=1, Mon=2, Sat=7). KST No Setting 42 Maintenance Service Define the service code used to execute maintenance functions.
PAGE 160
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) to customize the Service Codes which are used for registration and setup. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10, and 11-12 through 11-16. The following chart shows: ● The item number of each code.
PAGE 161
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) Item No.
PAGE 162
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) Item No. Terminals Default 40 Off-Premise Call Forwarding KTS, SLT *4 41 Tandem Ringing KTS, SLT No Setting 15-07 30-03 42 Not Used - - - 43 Headset Mode Switching This option determines how long after the hookswitch is released the SLT will hear dial tone before the terminal goes into headset mode. SLT 188 44 Automated Attendant (DSPDB) - Not Used in U.S.
PAGE 163
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) Item No. 65 Item Terminals Default KTS No Setting Headset Mode Switching Define the service code (up to 8 digits) to be used to set the headset mode for the following terminals: Dterm 8* (Aspire keysets), DT3** (UX5000 digital keysets), and DT7** (UX5000 IP keysets). With this option set, the speaker button is used to answer/hang up calls.
PAGE 164
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) to customize the Service Codes which are used for service access. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10, 11-11, and 11-13 through 11-16. The following chart shows: ● The number of each code (01-48) ● The function of the Service Code.
PAGE 165
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) Item No.
PAGE 166
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) Item No.
PAGE 167
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 11-12 (Service Code Setup (for Service Access)): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 11 12 11-12-01 Bypass_Call back ↑ 3. 801 select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 11-12-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. ↓ → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 168
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD) 11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD) Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD) to customize the Service Codes which are used with the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 through 11-12 and 11-14 through 11-16. The following chart shows: ● The number of each code (01-09) ● The function of the Service Code.
PAGE 169
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD) Item No. 13 Item ACD Agent Changing Own ACD Group Using this service code, an ACD Agent can reassign themselves to another ACD Group. Terminals Default KTS 170 New Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 11-13 (Service Code Setup (for ACD)): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 11 13 11-13-01 KTS ACD LgIn/Out*5 back ↑ ↓ select 3.
PAGE 170
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) 11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) to customize the Service Codes which are used with the Hotel/Motel feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 through 11-13, 11-15 and 11-16. The Service Codes can only be used at terminals registered as hotel terminals in Program 42-02.
PAGE 171
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) Item No. Item Terminals Default 15 Room Status Change for Other Extension KTS, SLT 141 16 Room Status Output KTS, SLT 142 17 Hotel Room Monitor KTS, SLT 175 18 Hotel PMS Toll Restriction Set KTS 166 19 Hotel Room Data Set - Not Used - KTS - Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Hotel/Motel Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 11-14 (Service Code Setup (for Hotel)): 1. 2.
PAGE 172
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) 11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) to customize the special access Service Codes which are used by the administrator in the Hotel/Motel feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 through 11-14 and 11-16.
PAGE 173
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) Item No. Item Terminals Default 12 Extension Data Swap Define the service code (up to 8 digits) to be used with the Extension Data Swap feature. • When swapping IP extensions, the terminals will automatically reset after the swap. KTS, SLT No Setting 13 Function Setting via DISA Define the service code an outside caller dials when on a DISA line in order to access certain UX5000 features.
PAGE 174
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup 11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup to customize the one-digit Service Codes used when a busy or ring back signal is heard. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 through 11-15. The following chart shows: ● The number of each code (01-11) ● The function of the Service Code.
PAGE 175
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup Feature Cross Reference Refer to chart above. Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 11-16 (Single Digit Service Code Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 11 16 11-16-01 Step Call back ↑ 3. select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 11-16-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. ↓ → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 176
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number 11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number to assign the ACD Master Number for each ACD Group. This is the number users dial to transfer calls to the ACD Group. Normally, you should use unassigned extension numbers (e.g., 600) for the master number.
PAGE 177
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 11-17 (ACD Group Pilot Number): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 11 17 11-17-01 ACD Group1 ACD-G_Pilot_No back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 11-17-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. ACD Groupnnn − + → Enter the ACD group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 178
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-19 : Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup 11-19 : Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 11-19 : Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup to assign the pilot number to be used for the Remote Conference. This is the number that outside parties will call in order to connect to a conference. Input Data Conference Group Number 1-4 Item No.
PAGE 179
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-19 : Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 11-19 (Remote Conference Group Pilot Number): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 11 19 11-19-01 Conf. Group1 Conf Number back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 11-19-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Conf. Groupn − + → Enter the Conference group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 180
Program 11 : System Numbering 11-19 : Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup - For Your Notes - 164 ◆ Programming UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 181
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup to set up the Night Mode options. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 182
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 12-01 (Night Mode Function Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 12 01 12-01-01 Manual_NT-Mode1:On back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 12-01-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 166 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 183
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns 12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns Level: SA Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns to define the daily pattern of the auto night switch setting. Each Night Mode Group has 10 patterns. These patterns are used in Programs 12-03 and 12-04. The daily pattern consists of 20 timer settings.
PAGE 184
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns Time Pattern 2 0:00 Mode 2 (night) Time setting 01: 0:00 00:00 to 00:00 Mode 2 (night) Default All groups, all patterns : 00:00 to 00:00 = Mode 1 Time Pattern 1 Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode 01 0000 0800 2 02 0800 1700 1 03 1700 0000 2 04 0000 0000 1 : : : : 20 0000 0000 1 Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode 01 0000 0000 2 02 0000 0000 1 : : : : 20 0000 0000 1 Set Time N
PAGE 185
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 12-02 (Automatic Night Service Patterns): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 12 02 12-02-01 Mode Group1 PTTN 01-01 STRT=00:00 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 12-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Mode Groupn − + → Enter the Night Mode Service Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 186
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching 12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching to define a weekly schedule of night-switch settings. Input Data Night Mode Service Group Number 01-32 Item No.
PAGE 187
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching Feature Cross Reference ● Night Service Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 12-03 (Weekly Night Serv ice Switching): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 12 03 12-03-01 Mode Group1 Sunday =Pttrn2 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 12-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Mode Group1 − + → Enter the Night Mode Service Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 188
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching 12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching to define a yearly schedule of holiday night-switch settings. This schedule is used for setting of special days which the company is expected to be closed, such as national holiday. Input Data Night Mode Service Group Number 01-32 Item No.
PAGE 189
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 12-04 (Holiday Night Service Switching): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 12 04 12-04-01 Mode Group1 Date01/01 =PTTN0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 12-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Mode Group1 − + → Enter the Night Mode Service Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 190
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions 12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions to a assign Day/Night Mode Group for each extension. Input Data Extension Number Max. 8 Digits Item No.
PAGE 191
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks 12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks to assign a Day/Night Mode Group for each trunk port. Input Data Trunk Port Number 1-200 Item No.
PAGE 192
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode 12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode to make an original text message which is displayed on an LCD of keyset terminal in each Night Mode. Input Data Night Mode Service Group Number 01-32 Day/Night Mode 1-8 Item No.
PAGE 193
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 12-07 (Text Data for Night Mode): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 12 07 12-07-01 Mode Group1 Mode1 Text= back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 12-07-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Mode Group1 − + → Enter the Night Mode Service Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 194
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-08 : Night Mode Service Range 12-08 : Night Mode Service Range Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 12-08 : Night Mode Service Range to set the number of modes a user will toggle through when using the Night Mode Programmable Function Key to toggle night modes. The UX5000 provides 8 day/nights modes. Input Data Night Mode Service Group Number 01-32 Item No.
PAGE 195
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-08 : Night Mode Service Range Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 12-08 (Night Mode Service Range): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 12 08 12-08-01 Mode Group1 Range back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 12-08-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Mode Group1 − + → Enter the Night Mode Service Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 196
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup 12-08 : Night Mode Service Range - For Your Notes - 180 ◆ Programming UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 197
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-01 : Abbreviated Dialing Function Setup Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-01 : Abbreviated Dialing Function Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 13-01 : Abbreviated Dialing Function Setup to define the Abbreviated Dialing functions. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 198
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-01 : Abbreviated Dialing Function Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 13-01 (Abbreviated Dialing Function Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 13 01 13-01-01 Abb.Dial 0:Trunk OTG back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 13-01-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 182 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 199
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-02 : Group Abbreviated Dialing Bins 13-02 : Group Abbreviated Dialing Bins Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 13-02 : Group Abbreviated Dialing Bins to define the range of bin numbers to be used by each Abbreviated Dialing group (refer to Program 13-03). Input Data Item No.
PAGE 200
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-02 : Group Abbreviated Dialing Bins Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 13-02 (Group Abbreviated Dialing Bins): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 13 02 13-02-01 Abb Group 1 Group Start Area 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 13-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 184 ◆ Programming Abb Group nnn − + → Enter the Abbreviated Dialing group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 201
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-03 : Abbreviated Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions 13-03 : Abbreviated Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions Level: Feature Availability IN • Available - 64 Abbreviated Dialing Groups. Description Use Program 13-03 : Abbreviated Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions to assign Abbreviated Dialing Group for each extension. Input Data Extension Number Up to 8 digits Item No.
PAGE 202
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-03 : Abbreviated Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 13-03 (Abbreviated Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 13 03 13-03-01 TEL301 Group 1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 13-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 186 ◆ Programming TELnnn − + → Enter the extension number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 203
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-04 : Abbreviated Dialing Number and Name 13-04 : Abbreviated Dialing Number and Name Level: Feature Availability SB • Available. Description Use Program 13-04 : Abbreviated Dialing Number and Name to store Abbreviated Dialing data into the Abbreviated Dialing areas. This program is also used to define the names assigned to the Abbreviated Dialing numbers. Input Data Abbreviated Dialing Bin Number Item No.
PAGE 204
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-04 : Abbreviated Dialing Number and Name Feature Cross Reference ● Abbreviated Dialing Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 13-04 (Abbreviated Dialing Number and Name): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 13 04 13-04-01 Abb Area0 Dial = back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 13-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 205
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-05 : Abbreviated Dialing Trunk Group 13-05 : Abbreviated Dialing Trunk Group Level: Feature Availability SB • Available. Description Use Program 13-05 : Abbreviated Dialing Trunk Group to define the trunk group to be seized for each Abbreviated Dialing number (refer to Program 13-05). If this program has an entry of ‘0’ (no setting), then seizing a line follows the trunk access group routing of the caller’s extension (refer to Program 14-06).
PAGE 206
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-05 : Abbreviated Dialing Trunk Group Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 13-05 (Abbreviated Dialing Trunk Group): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 13 05 13-05-01 ABB Area0 TRK GP Number 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 13-05-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 190 ◆ Programming ABB Areannn − + → Enter the Abbreviated Dialing Area number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 207
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-07 : Telephone Book Number and Name 13-07 : Telephone Book Number and Name Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 13-07 : Telephone Book Number and Name to define the Telephone Books. Input Data Telephone Books 1-100 Memory Number 0-299 Item No. Item Entries Default 01 Dial Data Use this program to store the dialing data for each Telephone Book. Up to 300 entries can be made in each Telephone Book.
PAGE 208
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-07 : Telephone Book Number and Name Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 13-07 (Telephone Book Number and Name): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 13 07 13-07-01 TelBook1301 Mem000:Dial = back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 13-07-nn TelBook1301 Mem000:nnnnnn = ← 4. 5. 6. 192 ◆ Programming − + → Enter the Telephone Book number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 209
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-08 : Telephone Book System Name 13-08 : Telephone Book System Name Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 13-08 : Telephone Book System Name to define the name of the Telephone Books. Input Data Telephone Books Item No. 01 Item Name Define the name of the Telephone Book.
PAGE 210
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-08 : Telephone Book System Name Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 13-08 (Telephone Book Name): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 13 08 13-08-01 Name TelBook1301 ← 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 13-08-nn Name ← 4. 5. 6. 194 ◆ Programming → TelBook1301 − + → Enter the Telephone Book number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 211
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-09 : Telephone Book Group Name 13-09 : Telephone Book Group Name Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 13-09 : Telephone Book Group Name to define the name for the Telephone book Group. Input Data Telephone Books 1-100 Group Number 1-20 Item No. 01 Item Group Name Use this program to define the name of the Telephone Book group.
PAGE 212
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-09 : Telephone Book Group Name Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 13-09 (Telephone Book Group Name): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 13 09 13-09-01 TelBook1301 Group01 = Group 01 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 13-09-nn TelBook1301 Groupnn - nnnnnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 196 ◆ Programming − + → Enter the Telephone Book number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 213
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-10 : Telephone Book Routing 13-10 : Telephone Book Routing Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 13-10 : Telephone Book Routing to define the routing for the Telephone book Group. Input Data Telephone Books Item No. 01 Item Routing This program defines the dial routing of the Telephone Book group. When an outside call is placed, the UX5000 follows Program 14-06-01.
PAGE 214
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing 13-10 : Telephone Book Routing Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 13-10 (Telephone Book Routing): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 13 10 13-10-01 TelBook1301 Mode 0:Trunk OTG back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 13-10-nn Mode ← 4. 5. 6. 198 ◆ Programming − TelBook1301 n:nnnnnnnn + → Enter the Telephone Book number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 215
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each trunk port. Refer to the chart below for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Input Data Trunk Port Number 1-200 Item No. Item 01 Trunk Name Set the names for trunks.
PAGE 216
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup Item No. Item 07 Outgoing Calls Use this option to allow/prevent outgoing calls on the trunk you are programming. 0 = Prevented 1 = Allowed 1 08 Toll Restriction Use this option to enable/disable Toll Restriction for the trunk. If enabled, the trunk follows Toll Restriction programming (ex: Programs 21-05, 21-06). If disabled, the trunk is a toll free line.
PAGE 217
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup Item No. Item 17 Trunk to Trunk Warning Tone for Long Conversation Alarm Use this option to enable or disable the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature for DISA callers. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 18 Warning Tone For Incoming Calls This option can be used to enable the Warning Tone for Long Conversations for incoming calls only.
PAGE 218
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup Item No. Item 25 Continue/Disconnect Trunk-to-Trunk Conversation When Program 24-02-10 is set to disconnect a trunk after the defined time, determine whether or not a user should have the ability to use the continue/disconnect code. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 24-02-10 26 Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer Mode For each trunk, enable (1) or disable (0) the Step Transfer function when using the Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer feature.
PAGE 219
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup Default Trunk Port Number Name 001 LINE 001 002 LINE 002 : : 200 LINE 200 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Refer to features in above chart. Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 14-01 (Basic Trunk Data Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 14 01 14-01-01 Trunk1 TRK Name = LINE 001 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 14-01-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 220
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup 14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each analog trunk port. Refer to the chart below for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No.
PAGE 221
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 07 DP to DTMF Conversion Options Determine how a user can convert a Dial Pulse (DP) call to a DTMF call. For each trunk, set the type of DP to DTMF conversion required. There are three conversion options: Automatic (0), Automatic and Manual (1), or Manual (2).
PAGE 222
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 15-03-11 16 Caller ID Type - Not Used in U.S. Select the type of Caller ID signal from an analog trunk - FSK or DTMF. 0 = FSK 1 = DTMF 0 17 Synchronous Ringing Enable or disable the Synchronous Ringing feature. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 18 Busy Tone Detection on Talking Enable or disable if busy tone is detected when a DIL or DID/DISA is received.
PAGE 223
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 14-02 (Analog Trunk Data Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 14 02 14-02-01 Trunk1 DP/DTMF 2:PB back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 14-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Trunknnn − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 224
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-04 : Behind PBX Setup 14-04 : Behind PBX Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 14-04 : Behind PBX Setup to indicate if the trunk is installed behind a PBX. There is one item for each of the Night Service Modes: Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No.
PAGE 225
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-04 : Behind PBX Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 14-04 (Behind PBX Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 14 04 14-04-01 Trunk1 Mode1 LN-Type=0:Trunk back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 14-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Trunknnn − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 226
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-05 : Trunk Group 14-05 : Trunk Group Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 14-05 : Trunk Groups to assign trunks to Trunk Groups. You can also assign the outbound priority for trunks within the group. When users dial up the trunk group, they seize the trunks in the order you specify in the outbound priority entry. Input Data Trunk Port Number 1-200 Item No.
PAGE 227
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-05 : Trunk Group Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 14-05 (Trunk Group): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 14 05 14-05-01 Trunk1 Group No. 1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 14-05-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Trunknnn − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 228
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing Level: Feature Availability IN • Available - 100 Trunk Group Numbers. Description Use Program 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing to set up an outbound routing table for the trunk groups you assigned in Program 14-05. When users dial 9, the UX5000 routes their calls in the order (priority) you specify. For example, if a user dials 9 and all calls in the first group are busy, the UX5000 may route the call to another group.
PAGE 229
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing Default Route 1, Order Number 1 = 1 (Trunk Group 1), Order Numbers 2, 3, 4 = 0 (not specified) All Other Routes (2-100) and Order Numbers (1-4) = 0 (not specified) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 14-06 (Trunk Group Routing): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 14 06 14-06-01 Route TBL1 Order1 Data1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
PAGE 230
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup 14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup to set up the Trunk Access Maps. This sets an extension’s access options for trunks. For example, an extension can only place outgoing calls on trunks to which it has outgoing access. There are 200 Access Maps with all 200 trunk ports programmed in Map 1 with full access.
PAGE 231
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup Feature Cross Reference ● ● Central Office Calls, Answering Central Office Calls, Placing Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 14-07 (Trunk Access Map Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 14 07 14-07-01 Access Map1 TRK_ 001=7:OTG/INC/Hold back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 14-07-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 232
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks 14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks to define a trunk’s Music on Hold source as either the ACI or COI port. Note: If ACI is selected as the source in Item 1, the port number for the source must be selected in Item 2. Input Data Trunk Port Number 1-200 Item No.
PAGE 233
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 14-08 (Music on Hold Source for Trunks): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 14 08 14-08-01 Trunk1 MOH Type 0:Internal back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 14-08-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Trunknnn − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 234
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-09 : ACI Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks 14-09 : ACI Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 14-09 : ACI Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks to set the ACI Conversation Recording destination for each trunk. Note: If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program 15-12 will be followed. Input Data Trunk Port Number 1-200 Item No.
PAGE 235
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-09 : ACI Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 14-09 (ACI Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 14 09 14-09-01 Trunk1 Rec.Distn.Ext back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 14-09-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Trunknnn − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 236
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-10 : Power Failure Terminal for Trunks 14-10 : Power Failure Terminal for Trunks Level: Feature Availability IN • Not Available in U:S. Description This program is not used in U.S. software.
PAGE 237
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk 14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk to set the H.323 IP trunk ID. This option is for H.323 trunks only - it is not used for SIP trunks. Input Data Trunk Port Number 1-200 Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 IP Setup for IP Trunk Set the ID for each H.323 IP trunk in each networked system.
PAGE 238
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 14-11 (ID Setup for IP Trunk): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 14 11 14-11-01 Trunkx ID back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 14-11-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 222 ◆ Programming − Trunkx + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 239
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 4-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk 4-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk to set the Register ID options for SIP trunks. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Register ID This program sets the SIP Register ID for each trunk. If both 14-12 and 15-16 are assigned, then the UX5000 uses the data in Program 15-16.
PAGE 240
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup 4-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 14-12 (SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 14 12 14-12-01 Trunk1 Register ID 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 14-12-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 224 ◆ Programming − Trunkx + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 241
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup Level: SA Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup to define the basic settings for each extension. Note: The item numbers indicated below are different when using PCPro/WebPro. Refer to the program within the PCPro/WebPro application to determine the correct item number. Input Data Extension Number Item No.
PAGE 242
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup 04 ISDN Caller ID If both Program 15-01-04 and 10-03-05 are enabled, the UX5000 includes Caller ID in the Setup message as “Presentation Allowed”. If these options are disabled, it will be “Presentation Restricted”. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 10-03-05 05 Restriction for Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line Enable or disable supervised dial detection for an extension.
PAGE 243
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 15-01 (Basic Extension Data Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 15 01 15-01-01 TEL301 Ext.Name = STA 301 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 15-01-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 244
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-02 : Multi-Line Terminal Basic Setup 15-02 : Multi-Line Terminal Basic Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 15-02 : Multi-Line Terminal Basic Setup to set up various keyset options. Input Data Extension Number Item No. 01 Item Display Language Selection (Use line keys 1-5 to select 00-05. To select options 6-11, press CALL2, then press line keys 1-6. Key 1 is option 6, Key 2 is option 7, etc.
PAGE 245
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-02 : Multi-Line Terminal Basic Setup Item No. Item 04 Abbreviated Dialing DIAL Key Control Use this option to control the function of the extension’s DIAL key when used with Abbreviated Dialing. The DIAL key can access either the Common or Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers. 0 = Common and Individual Abbreviated Dialing 1 = Group Abbreviated Dialing 0 05 Transfer Key Operation Mode Use this option to set the operating mode of the extension’s CONF key.
PAGE 246
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-02 : Multi-Line Terminal Basic Setup Item No. Item 12 Off Hook Ringing Use this option to set the keyset’s off hook signaling. Off hook signaling occurs when a keyset user receives a second call while busy on a handset call. DID, DNIS and DIL trunks can use any of the 4 options - normal/ring group trunks can only use options “0” or “1”. To enable/disable Off Hook Signaling for an extension’s Class of Service, use Program 20-13-06.
PAGE 247
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-02 : Multi-Line Terminal Basic Setup Item No. Item 21 Virtual Extension Access Mode (when idle Virtual Extension key pressed) Determine whether an extension’s Virtual Extension/Call Coverage Key should be as a DSS key to the extension and for receiving calls (0), for placing and receiving calls (1),or just receiving incoming calls (2).
PAGE 248
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-02 : Multi-Line Terminal Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 25 -- Not Used -- - - 26 MSG Key Operation Mode Determine whether an extension’s MSG key should function as a Message key or Voice Mail key. If set as a Message key, the user will be able to press the key to call the voice mail only when they have new messages.
PAGE 249
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-02 : Multi-Line Terminal Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 32 -- Not Used -- - - 33 -- Not Used -- - - 34 Call History Log Mode Determine if a user’s Call History Log key will indicate missed trunk calls only (0) or both missed extension and trunk calls (1).
PAGE 250
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-02 : Multi-Line Terminal Basic Setup Item No. Item Default Related Program 43 Headset Ring Duration For UX5000 keyset only: Determine how long a call will ring the headset beofre changing to a keysest ring.
PAGE 251
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-02 : Multi-Line Terminal Basic Setup Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation External Incoming Signal Frequency (Pattern 1) High Middle Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 16Hz Modulation 16Hz Modulation 16Hz Modulation External Incoming Signal Frequency (Pattern 2) High Middle Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation External Incoming Signal Frequency (Pattern 3) High Middle Low 2000 1400 1
PAGE 252
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-02 : Multi-Line Terminal Basic Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Refer to above chart. Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 15-02 (Multi-Line Terminal Basic Data Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 15 02 15-02-01 TEL301 Language 1:English back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 15-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 253
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-03 : Single Line Terminal Basic Data Setup 15-03 : Single Line Terminal Basic Data Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 15-03 : Single Line Terminal Basic Data Setup to set up various single line terminal options. Input Data Extension Number Max. 8 digits Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 SLT Signaling Type Use this option to tell the UX5000 the type of dialing the connected terminal uses.
PAGE 254
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-03 : Single Line Terminal Basic Data Setup 07 On Hook When Holding (SLT) After placing a call on hold, determine if the SLT should be able to place the handset back on hook. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 08 Answer on hook when holding (SLT) 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 09 Caller ID Function - For External Module Enable (1) or disable (0) the Caller ID FSK signal for an external Caller ID module or a 3rd party vendor phone with Caller ID display.
PAGE 255
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-03 : Single Line Terminal Basic Data Setup 17 Dial Tone Select When an SLT user has received a Message Waiting or Voice Mail message, this option allows the UX5000 to provide an initial stutter dial tone (three beeps then normal dial tone) when the SLT handset is lifted.
PAGE 256
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-03 : Single Line Terminal Basic Data Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 15-03 (Single Line Terminal Basic Data Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 15 03 15-03-01 TEL301 SLT Type 0:DP back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 15-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 240 ◆ Programming TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 257
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-05 : IP Terminal Basic Data Setup 15-05 : IP Terminal Basic Data Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 15-05 : IP Terminal Basic Data Setup to set up the basic settings for an IP terminal. Input Data Extension Number Item No. Max. 8 digits Item Input Data 01 Terminal Type for Each Extension Viewing Only - No changes permitted 0 = NGT 1 = H.
PAGE 258
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-05 : IP Terminal Basic Data Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 09 Call Control Port 0-65535 0 10 NGT Voice Path Port 0-65535 0 11 Dterm IP Call Procedure Port 0-65535 0 Effective only for NGT and SIP MLT DT700, 15-05-01. 12 - Not Used - 13 - Not Used - 14 - Not Used - 15 Codec Type Set the basic CODEC to be used by the terminal. This option is only used when 15-05-01 is set to 0 or 4. UX5000 CODEC is set in 84-11 and 84-24.
PAGE 259
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-05 : IP Terminal Basic Data Setup Item No. Item Default Related Program 20 Bottom Option Information Set the bottom option adapter to be used with an IP terminal. 0=No Option 1=ADA 2=BHA 0 10-03-10 21 Handset Option Information Select the handset option used with an IP terminal.
PAGE 260
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-05 : IP Terminal Basic Data Setup Item No. Item 31 Warning Sound While Talking Determine if a warning tone is allowed while active on a call. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 32 Key Reading Out Function Determine if this feature is enabled. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 33 LAN Side IP Address - View Only - 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255 34 Touch Panel On/Off Determine if the touch panels on the IP CTS terminals are enabled for an extension user.
PAGE 261
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions 15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions to define the trunk access map for each extension. An extension can only place outgoing calls on trunks to which it has outgoing access. Use Program 14-07 to define the available access maps. Input Data Extension Number Max. 8 digits Day/Night Mode 1-8 Item No.
PAGE 262
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 15-06 (Trunk Access Map for Extensions): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 15 06 15-06-01 TEL301 Mode1 Acc-Map 1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 15-06-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 246 ◆ Programming TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 263
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys to set the functions of an extension’s Programmable Function Key. For certain functions, you can append data to the key’s basic function. For example, the function 26 appended by data 1 makes a Group Call Pickup key for Pickup Group 1. You can also program Function Keys using Service Codes.
PAGE 264
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys Function Number List [1] General Function Level (00 – 99) (Service Code 851) Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication DESI-Less Displayed Names 00 Not Defined 01 DSS / One-Touch 02 Microphone Key (ON/OFF) Red On: Mic Off Off: Mic On MIC 03 DND Key Red On: DND DND 04 BGM (ON/OFF) Red On: BGM On Off: BGM Off BGM 05 Headset Red On: Headset in use HSET 06 Transfer Key None 07 Conference Key Red O
PAGE 265
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication DESI-Less Displayed Names 15 Follow Me Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded FLWME 16 Call Forward to Station Slow Blink (Red): Forwarded Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded with Follow Me - 17 Call Forward to Device Slow Blink (Red): Forwarded - 18 Text Message Setup Message Numbers (01-20) Red On: Feature activated by Function Key - 19 External Group Paging External Paging
PAGE 266
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication DESI-Less Displayed Names 37 DND / Call FWD Override Call None - 38 Message Waiting None - 39 Room Monitoring Rapid Blink (Red): While being monitored Slow Blink (Red): While monitoring - 40 Handset Transmission Cutoff Red On: Transmission cut-off - 41 Secretary Call (Buzzer) Extension Number Red On: Transmission side Rapid Blink (Red): Receiver side - 42
PAGE 267
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication DESI-Less Displayed Names 54 External Call Forward by Door Box Red On: Active - 55 Extension Name Edit None - 56 General Purpose LED Operation 001-100 Red On: Active - 101-200 Green On: Active - 201-300 Press Once = Red On: Active or Press Twice = Green On: Active - 001-100 Red On: Active - 101-200 Green On: Active - 201-300 Press Once = Red On: Active
PAGE 268
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication DESI-Less Displayed Names 68 Voice Mail Service (DSPDB) - Not Used in the U.S. - 0 = Skip 1 = Back Skip 2 = Auto Attendant Monitor Slow Flash: New Message Restrict Mode With Option 2 (Monitor Mode) Slow Blink (Red): Monitor setting - Automatic Red On: Monitor setting Manual - 69 Conversation Record - ACI 0 = ACI as Record Destination 1 = Not Used in U.S.
PAGE 269
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication 83 Live Record Function 84 Drop Key 85 Directory Dialing 86 Set Private Call Refuse This key enables/disables the “Private” call refusal for the trunks set to "1" in Program 14-01-27. Slow Blink (Red): Active - 87 Set Caller ID Refuse This key enables/disables the Caller ID number refusal for the trunks set to "1" in Program 14-01-27.
PAGE 270
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication 97 Door Box Door Box Number (1-8) Assign the Door Box number to be called when this key is pressed.
PAGE 271
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys [2] Appearance Function Level (*00 - *99) (Service Code 852) Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication DESI-Less Names Displayed *00 Not Used *01 Trunk Key Trunk Number (001-200) Red On: Trunk busy by another user Green On: Trunk busy by extension LINE XXX *02 Trunk Group/Loop Key Trunk Group Number (001-100) Red On: Trunk busy by another user Green On: Trunk busy by extension TKGPXXX *03 Virtual Extension
PAGE 272
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys *14 ACD Start / End Red On: ACD operation end - *15 ACD Monitor Mode - Terminal Red On: Under monitor - *16 ACD Standby Mode Red On: Standby - *17 ACD Wrap-Up Mode Red On: Under work time Slow Blink (Red): Under reservation - *18 ACD Overflow Control Red On: Enable Slow Blink (Red): Disable - *19 ACD Queue Status Display Check *30 CALL1 Key *31 CALL2 Key ACD Group Number - Conditions When a key is programmed u
PAGE 273
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup 15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup Level: IN Feature Availability • Available - 256 virtual extension ports. Description Use Program 15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup to assign a ring tone range (0-4) to incoming virtual extensions assigned to a Virtual Extension key (Program 15-07).
PAGE 274
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Multiple Directory Number / Call Coverage Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 15-08 (Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 15 08 15-08-01 TEL301 V’Tual_Ext_Rng0:Pattern1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 15-08-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 275
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment 15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment Level: Feature Availability SA • Available - 256 virtual extension ports. Description Use Program 15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment to assign the ringing options for an extension’s Virtual Extension Key or Virtual Department Group Answer Key which is defined in Program 15-07. You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode.
PAGE 276
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 15-09 (Virtual Extension Ring Assignment): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 15 09 15-09-01 TEL301 KY01 Mode1 =0:No ← 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 15-09-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 260 ◆ Programming → TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 277
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup 15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available - 256 virtual extension ports. Description Use Program 15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup to set the priority (1-4) for the Virtual Extension Ring Tones set in Program 15-08. When Virtual Extension calls ring an extension simultaneously, the tone with the highest order number (e.g.
PAGE 278
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 15-10 (Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 15 10 15-10-01 Order1 TEL301 0:Pattern1 ← 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 15-10-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 262 ◆ Programming → TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 279
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment 15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment Level: Feature Availability SA • Available - 256 virtual extension ports. Description Use Program 15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment to assign the delayed ringing options for an extension’s Virtual Extension or Virtual Department Group Answer keys (defined in Program 15-09). You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode.
PAGE 280
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 15-11 (Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 15 11 15-11-01 TEL301 KY01 Mode1 =0:No back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 15-11-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 264 ◆ Programming TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 281
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions 15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions to set the ACI Conversation Recording destination for each extension. Note: If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program 15-12 will be followed.
PAGE 282
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 15-12 (Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 15 12 15-12-01 TEL301 Rec.Destin.Ext back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 15-12-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 266 ◆ Programming TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 283
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-13 : Loop Keys 15-13 : Loop Keys Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 15-13 : Loop Keys to assign the Loop Key data for each keyset terminal. Loop Keys can be incoming, outgoing or both ways. Outgoing Loop Keys use the entry in item 1. Incoming Loop Keys use the entry in item 2. Both Way Loop Keys follow the entries in both item 1 and 2. Input Data Item Number Extension Number Max.
PAGE 284
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-13 : Loop Keys Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 15-13 (Loop Keys): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 15 13 15-13-01 TEL301 OUTGOING KY01 = 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 15-12-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 268 ◆ Programming TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 285
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys 15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys to define the One-Touch key data for each keyset terminal. Input Data Extension Number Max. 8 digits Key Number 01-10 Item No.
PAGE 286
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 15-14 (Programmable One-Touch Keys): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 15 14 15-14-01 TEL301 KY01 Dial= back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 15-14-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 270 ◆ Programming TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 287
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension 15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension to set the SIP Register ID to an extension port. If both 14-12 and 15-16 are assigned, then the UX5000 uses the data in Program 15-16. Register ID 0 is associated with Program 10-28 and 10-29 data. Other registered IDs (1-31) are associated with Program 10-36 data.
PAGE 288
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 15-16 (SIP Register ID Setup for Extension): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 15 16 15-16-01 TEL301301 Register ID back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 15-16-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 272 ◆ Programming TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 289
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options 15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options to set the operation of the virtual key for each extension. Input Data Extension Number Max. 8 digits Item No.
PAGE 290
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options Feature Cross Reference ● Multiple Directory Numbers/Call Coverage Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 15-18 (Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 15 18 15-18-01 TEL301301 VE Key Mode 0:Released back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 15-18-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 291
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-19 : System Telephone Book Setup for Extension 15-19 : System Telephone Book Setup for Extension Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 15-19 : System Telephone Book Setup for Extension to assign the Telephone Books to each extension and the options for them. Input Data Extension Number Item No. Item Max. 8 digits Entries Default 01 Telephone Book Number 1 Assign the first Telephone Book to each extension.
PAGE 292
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-19 : System Telephone Book Setup for Extension Feature Cross Reference ● Central Telephone Book Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 15-19 (System Telephone Book Setup for Extension): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 15 19 15-19-01 TEL301301 TelBook1 1 ← 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 15-19-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 293
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-20 : LCD Line Key Name Assignment 15-20 : LCD Line Key Name Assignment Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 15-20 : LCD Line Key Name Assignment to assign the key names (up to 13 characters maximum per name) for the DESI-Less keysets and DESI-Less Line Key Units. Input Data Extension Number Max. 8 digits Line Key Number 01-48 Item No.
PAGE 294
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-20 : LCD Line Key Name Assignment Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 15-20 (LCD Line Key Name Assignment): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 15 20 15-20-01 TEL301301 Key No.01-LINE 1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 15-20-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 278 ◆ Programming TELnnn − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 295
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup 15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup to define required UX5000 data for the Mobile Extension feature. Input Data Extension Number Item No. Item Max. 8 digits Entries Default 01 Mobile Extension Target Setup Define the Abbreviated Dial bin which will be the target destination for the Mobile Extension.
PAGE 296
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup 15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 15-22 (Mobile Extension Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 15 22 15-22-01 TEL301301 ABB NO. 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 15-22-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 280 ◆ Programming TELnnn − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 297
Program 16 : Department Group Setup 16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup Program 16 : Department Group Setup 16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup Level: IN Feature Availability • Available - 64 Department Groups. Description Use Program 16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup to set the function mode for each department group. Input Data Department Group Number 01-64 Item No.
PAGE 298
Program 16 : Department Group Setup 16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup Item No. Item 05 Department Group All Ring Mode Operation Determine whether calls ringing a Department Group should ring all extensions in the group simultaneously automatically or manually when using the service code defined in Program 11-12-09. Default Related Program 0 = Manual 1 = Automatic 0 11-16-10 Input Data This option does not apply to secondary department groups (16-01-03).
PAGE 299
Program 16 : Department Group Setup 16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 16-01 (Department Group Basic Data Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 16 01 16-01-01 TEL Group1 Dept.Name = back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 16-01-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. TEL Groupnn − + → Enter the Department Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 300
Program 16 : Department Group Setup 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions Level: Feature Availability IN • Available - 64 Department Groups. Description Use Program 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions to assign each extension to a Department Group and to assign the extension’s priority in the group. When a call comes into the group, it may ring the extensions in order of their priority.
PAGE 301
Program 16 : Department Group Setup 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 16-02 (Department Group Assignment for Extensions): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 16 02 16-02-01 TEL301 Extension Group1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 16-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 302
Program 16 : Department Group Setup 16-03 : Secondary Department Group 16-03 : Secondary Department Group Level: Feature Availability IN • Available - 64 Department Groups. Description Use Program 16-03 : Secondary Department Group to set a second Department Group for extensions. Each secondary Department Group can have up to 16 extensions assigned. Input Data Secondary Department (Extension) Group Number 01-64 Item No.
PAGE 303
Program 16 : Department Group Setup 16-03 : Secondary Department Group Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 16-03 (Secondary Department Group): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 16 03 16-03-01 Pilot Extn1 2ND_Group 01= back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 16-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Pilot Extnnn − + → Enter the pilot extension number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 304
Program 16 : Department Group Setup 16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups 16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups Level: Feature Availability IN • Available - 64 Department Groups. Description Use Program 16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups to prevent calling between certain Department Groups. This restricts calls to the extension numbers as well as the Department Group number.
PAGE 305
Program 16 : Department Group Setup 16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 16-04 (Call Restriction Between Department Groups): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 16 04 16-04-01 Pilot Extn1 CallRestrictGrp 1=0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 16-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Pilot Extnnn − + → Enter the pilot extension number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 306
Program 16 : Department Group Setup 16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups - For Your Notes - 290 ◆ Programming UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 307
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-01 : System Options Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-01 : System Options Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 20-01 : System Options to set various UX5000 options. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Operator Access Mode When more than one operator is used, set the type of ringing priority used when an extension calls the operator terminal.
PAGE 308
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-01 : System Options Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 12 TelPro/WebPro Automatic Logout Timer For each extension, determine how long the UX5000 waits (1-86400 seconds) with no communication between the user and the UX5000 before logging the user out of programming. [900 = 15 minutes, 86400 = 24 hours].
PAGE 309
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-02 : System Options for Multi-Line Terminals 20-02 : System Options for Multi-Line Terminals Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 20-02 : System Options for Multi-Line Terminals to set various UX5000 options for Multi-Line Terminals. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 310
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-02 : System Options for Multi-Line Terminals Item No. Item Input Data Default 05 Headset Busy Mode Set the conditions under which a headset extension is busy to incoming callers. 0=Headset busy with one CALL key busy 1=Headset busy with both CALL keys busy 0 0-64800 seconds 5 When Call Queuing (Program 20-09-07) is turned off, this setting is followed.
PAGE 311
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-02 : System Options for Multi-Line Terminals Item No. Item Input Data Default 12 Forced Intercom Ringing Use this option to set voice-announce or Forced Intercom Ringing by default. Once this option is changed by a user with service codees 821/823, this setting is ignored for that extension.
PAGE 312
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-02 : System Options for Multi-Line Terminals Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-02 (System Options for Multi-Line Terminals): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 02 20-02-01 TRK-GP_Key_OP 0:Display back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 296 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 313
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-03 : System Options for Single Line Terminals 20-03 : System Options for Single Line Terminals Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 20-03 : System Options for Single Line Terminals to set up various options for Single Line Terminals. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 SLT Call Waiting Answer Mode For a busy single line (500/2500 type) terminal, set the mode used to answer a camped-on trunk call.
PAGE 314
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-03 : System Options for Single Line Terminals Item No. Item 04 Dial Sending Start Time for SLT or ARS When ARS or an analog extension user accesses a trunk and dials an outside call, the UX5000 waits this interval before outdialing the first digit. The timer will restart when a user dials another digit. Default Related Program 0-64800 seconds 3 20-03-03 20-03-07 Input Data When using a 3rd-party external paging device, set this option to “1”.
PAGE 315
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-03 : System Options for Single Line Terminals Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-03 (System Options for Single Line Terminals): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 03 20-03-01 Call_Wait_Ans 0:Hooking ← 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. → → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 316
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions 20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions Level: Feature Availability IN • Available - 256 virtual extension ports. Description Use Program 20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions to set up various UX5000 options for Virtual Extensions. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 317
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-04 (System Options for Virtual Extensions): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 04 20-04-01 V-Ext.Answer 1:Keep ← 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. → → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 318
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-05 : Charging Cost Service 20-05 : Charging Cost Service Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description This program is not used.
PAGE 319
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions 20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions to assign a Class of Service to an extension. There are15 Classes of Service that can be assigned. To specify the options in each Class of Service, refer to Programs 20-07 through 20-13. You make eight entries for Program 20-06, one for each Night Service Mode.
PAGE 320
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-06 (Class of Service for Extensions): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 06 20-06-01 TEL301 Mode1 Class_No.1 ← 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-06-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 304 ◆ Programming → TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 321
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) 20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) to define the administrator service availability for each extension’s Class of Service. Input Data Class of Service Number 01-15 Class of Service Options (Administrator Level), Program 20-07 Default Item No.
PAGE 322
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) Class of Service Options (Administrator Level), Program 20-07 Default Item No. Item 11 Forced Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk only) Turn off or on an extension’s ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect. 12 Input Data Related Program COS 01-14 COS 15 0 = Off 1 = On 0 1 Trunk Port Disable Turn off or on an extension’s ability to busy out a trunk. using Service Code 145.
PAGE 323
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) Class of Service Options (Administrator Level), Program 20-07 Default Item No. Item 27 - Not Used - 30 Date Setting Input Data 0 = Off 1 = On COS 01-14 COS 15 Related Program 11-10-41 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Class of Service Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-07 (Class of Service Options (Administrator Level)): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode.
PAGE 324
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) 20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) to define the outgoing call feature availability for each extension’s Class of Service. Input Data Class of Service Number 01-15 Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service), Program 20-08 Default Item No.
PAGE 325
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service), Program 20-08 Default Item No. Item 10 Switching from Handsfree Answerback to Forced Intercom Ringing Turn off or on an extension’s ability to force Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls.
PAGE 326
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-08 (Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service)): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 08 20-08-01 FCTN Cls1 Intercom_Call 1:On ← 3. → Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-08-nn FCTN Clsnn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 310 ◆ Programming − + → Enter the Class of Service number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 327
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) 20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) to define the incoming call feature availability for each extension’s Class of Service. Input Data Class of Service Number 01-15 Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service), Program 20-09 Default Item No.
PAGE 328
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Class of Service Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-09 (Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service)): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 09 20-09-01 FCTN Cls1 2nd_Call_DDI-Ovrride0:Of back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-09-nn FCTN Clsnn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 329
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) 20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) to define the answer feature availability for each extension’s Class of Service. Input Data Class of Service Number 01-15 Class of Service Options (Answer Service), Program 20-10 Item No.
PAGE 330
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Class of Service Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-10 (Class of Service Options (Answer Service)): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 10 20-10-01 FCTN Cls1 Call_Pickup 1:On back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-10-nn FCTN Clsnn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 331
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) 20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) to define the Hold and Transfer feature availability for each extension’s Class of Service. Input Data Class of Service Number 01-15 Class of Service Options (Answer Service), Program 20-11 Default Item No.
PAGE 332
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) Class of Service Options (Answer Service), Program 20-11 Default Item No. Item Input Data COS 01-14 COS 15 11 Automatic On Hook Transfer Turn off or on an extension’s ability to use Automatic On Hook Transfer 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 12 Call Forwarding Off-Premise Turn off or on an extension’s ability to set up Call Forwarding Off-Premise for their terminal.
PAGE 333
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Class of Service Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-11 (Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service)): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 11 20-11-01 FCTN Cls1 Call_Forward 1:On back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-11-nn FCTN Clsnn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 334
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service) 20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service) Level: Feature Availability IN • Not Available. Description This program is not used.
PAGE 335
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) 20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) to define the supplementary feature availability for each extension’s Class of Service. Input Data Class of Service Number 01-15 Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service), Program 20-13 Default Item No.
PAGE 336
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service), Program 20-13 Default Item No. Item Input Data COS 01-14 COS 15 09 Privacy Release Turn off or on an extension’s ability to initiate a Voice Call Conference 0 = Off 1 = On 1 1 10 Barge In Mode Enables the extension’s Barge In to be speech mode (0) or Monitor mode (1).
PAGE 337
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service), Program 20-13 Default Item No. Item Input Data COS 01-14 COS 15 22 Busy Status Display Turn off or on the ability to display the detail state of called party.
PAGE 338
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service), Program 20-13 Default Item No. Item Input Data COS 01-14 COS 15 Related Programs 35 Block Camp On Turn off or on an extension’s ability to block callers from dialing 2 to Camp On. 0 = Off 1 = On 0 0 36 Call Duration Timer In an extension’s Class of Service, turn off or on an extension’s Call Timer.
PAGE 339
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-13 (Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service)): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 13 20-13-01 FCTN Cls1 Long_Conv.Alarm 1:On back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-13-nn FCTN Clsnn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. − + → Enter the Class of Service number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 340
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M 20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M to enable/disable DISA and tie line Class of Service options. You assign a DISA Class of Service to DISA users in Program 25-09. Assign tie line Classes of Service in 34-02. Up to 15 DISA/E&M Classes of Service can be defined.
PAGE 341
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M Class of Service Options (DISA/E&M Service), Program 20-14 Item No. Item Input Data Default COS 01-14 COS 15 08 Direct Trunk Access This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to use Direct Trunk Access (Service Code 815).
PAGE 342
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-14 (Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 14 20-14-01 FCTN Cls1 Del._1digit_Dial O:Of back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-14-nn FCTN Clsnn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 326 ◆ Programming − + → Enter the Class of Service number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 343
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup 20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup to define the ringing cycles for each ring type. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 344
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup Number Ringing Cycle 11 On:0.25 / Off:0.25 / On:0.25 / Off:4.25 12 On:1.0 / Off:3.0 13 On:0.25 / Off:0.25 / On:0.25 / Off:2.25 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-15 (Ring Cycle Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 15 20-15-01 TRK Normal INC Call 8 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-15-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5.
PAGE 345
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages to enter the Selectable Display Messages. There are 20 alphanumeric messages, up to 24 characters long. Use the following chart when programming messages. Key for Entering Names When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can be up to 12 digits long.
PAGE 346
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages Default Number Message 1 IN MEETING UNTIL ##:## 2 MEETING ROOM - ######## 3 COME BACK ##:## 4 PLEASE CALL ########### 5 BUSY CALL AFTER ##:## 6 OUT FOR LUNCH BACK ##:## 7 BUSINESS TRIP BACK ##/## 8 BUSINESS TRIP ########## 9 GONE FOR THE DAY 10 ON VACATION UNTIL ##/## 11 MESSAGE 11 12 MESSAGE 12 13 MESSAGE 13 14 MESSAGE 14 15 MESSAGE 15 16 MESSAGE 16 17 MESSAGE 17 18 MESSAGE 18 19 MESSAGE 19 20 MESS
PAGE 347
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages Feature Cross Reference ● Selectable Display Messages Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-16 (Selectable Display Messages): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 16 20-16-01 Text Message1 IN MEETING UNTIL ##:## back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-16-nn Text Messagenn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 348
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-17 : Operator’s Extension 20-17 : Operator’s Extension Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 20-17 : Operator’s Extension to designate an operator. When an extension user dials “0” or “9” (defined by Program 11-01 Type 5), calls go to the operator selected in this program. If you don’t assign an extension in Program 90-11-01, UX5000 alarms appear on the extension assigned in this option. Input Data Operator Number 1-8 Item No.
PAGE 349
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-17 : Operator’s Extension Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-17 (Operator’s Extension): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 17 20-17-01 Operator1 Operator_No. back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-17-nn Operatorn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. − + → Enter the operator number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 350
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-18 : Service Tone Timers 20-18 : Service Tone Timers Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 20-18 : Service Tone Timer to set the values for the UX5000 service tone timers. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 351
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-18 : Service Tone Timers 09 Incoming Warning Beep Tone Signaling Interval 0-64800 seconds 60 When an incoming trunk is set to use the warning tone, define the interval between the tones. The warning tones continue, spaced by this interval, until the user hangs up. 14-01-18 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Distinctive Ringing, Tones, and Flash Patterns Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-18 (Service Tone Timers): 1. 2.
PAGE 352
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-19 : System Options for Caller ID 20-19 : System Options for Caller ID Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 20-19 : System Options for Caller ID to define the UX5000 options for the Caller ID feature. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Caller ID Displaying Format if Displaying Digits are more than 12 digits.
PAGE 353
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-19 : System Options for Caller ID 08 Area Code With the Caller ID feature, use this option to define the area code which will be deleted when using the Edit Caller ID List feature to edit a number. 6 Digits (0-9) - 15-02-15 20-09-02 15-07-01 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Caller ID Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-19 (System Options for Caller ID): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode.
PAGE 354
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data 20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data to define the messages which will be displayed when no Caller ID information is received. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 355
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation 20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation to define the UX5000 options for the Long Conversation feature. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Long Conversation Alarm 1 The warning tone for long toll calls sounds after this interval.
PAGE 356
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-21 (System Options for Long Conversation): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 21 20-21-01 Long_Conv.Al1 170 Sec. back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-21-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 340 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 357
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-22 : System Options for IP DECT Service 20-22 : System Options for IP DECT Service Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 20-22 : System Options for IP DECT Service to define the time the UX5000 waits before determining the IP DECT terminal is out of range. For incoming calls, the timer begins when the call is received.
PAGE 358
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-22 : System Options for IP DECT Service Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-22 (System Options for IP DECT Service): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 22 20-22-05 Time for judge8 back ↑ ↓ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-22-05 Time for judge8 ← 4. 5. 342 ◆ Programming Sec. select −1 +1 Sec. → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 359
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-23 : System Options for CTI 20-23 : System Options for CTI Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 20-23 : System Options for CTI to define the UX5000 options for the CTI feature. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Delayed Ring Timer for CTI TRK PORT is an effective timer according to demand (lineDevSpecific) by TAPI at TrunkStart.
PAGE 360
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-23 : System Options for CTI Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-23 (System Options for CTI Service): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 23 20-23-01 CTI_Serv.Ans. 30 Sec. back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-23-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 344 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 361
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-25 : ISDN Options 20-25 : ISDN Options Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 20-25 : ISDN Options to define the ISDN UX5000 options. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Send the Release Message After Subscriber Hangs Up 0 = Service Off 1 = Service On 1 02 Progress Indicate Information Element Detect 0 = Service Off 1 = Service On 1 03 Bearer Capability Select from SLT Outgoing 0 = 3.
PAGE 362
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-25 : ISDN Options 13 Busy Tone Mode 14 Operation Mode When Second T303 Timer Expires This option can be used to determine whether or not a release message is sent when the second T303 timer expires. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 0 = Normal 1 = Send Release Message 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● ISDN Compatibility Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-25 (ISDN Options): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode.
PAGE 363
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-28 : System Option for Trunk to Trunk Conversations 20-28 : System Option for Trunk to Trunk Conversations Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 20-28 : System Option for Trunk to Trunk Conversations to define the conversation continue/disconnection options. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 364
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-28 : System Option for Trunk to Trunk Conversations Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-28 (System Option for Trunk to Trunk Conversations): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 28 20-28-01 Continue code back ↑ ↓ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-28-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 348 ◆ Programming select → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 365
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-29 : Timer Class for Extensions 20-29 : Timer Class for Extensions Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 20-29 : Timer Class for Extensions to assign a Timer Class of Service to an extension. You make 8 entries for this program - one for each Night Service Mode. This entry can also be used for virtual extension numbers. Input Data Extension Number Max. 8 digits Item No.
PAGE 366
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-29 : Timer Class for Extensions Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-29 (Timer Class for Extensions): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 29 20-29-01 TEL301 Mode1 Class No.0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-29-01 TELxxx Moden Class No.n ← 4. 5. 6. 350 ◆ Programming − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 367
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks 20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks to assign a Timer Class of Service to a trunk. You make 8 entries for this program - one for each Night Service Mode. Input Data Trunk Numbers 001-200 Item No.
PAGE 368
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-30 (Timer Class for Trunks): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 30 20-30-01 TRUNK1 Mode1 Class No.0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-30-01 TRUNK1 Moden Class No.n ← 4. 5. 6. 352 ◆ Programming − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 369
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-31 : Timer Data 20-31 : Timer Data Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 20-31 : Timer Data to assign the time entry for each timer. These timers are used when a class is set with an entry from 1 to 15 in Program 20-28-01 and 20-29-01. When the timer class is set to 0, the system-wide timer is used instead.
PAGE 370
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-31 : Timer Data Class of Service Timer Data, Program 20-31 Item Default: Class 0 Follows Program 07 Type Timer Default Input Data 22-01-03 Trunk Timer Class of Service Ring No Answer Alarm Time If a trunk rings a key terminal longer than this interval, the UX5000 changes the ring cadence. This indicates to the user that the call has been ringing too long.
PAGE 371
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-31 : Timer Data Class of Service Timer Data, Program 20-31 Item Default: Class 0 Follows Program 16 24-02-04 Extension Timer Class of Service and Extension’s Class of Service which performed the blind transfer 17 25-07-02 18 Default Input Data Transfer Recall Time A blind transferred call recalls to the extension that initially transferred it after this interval.
PAGE 372
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-31 : Timer Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Class of Service Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-31 (Timer Data): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 31 20-31-01 nnnnn back ↑ 3. ← 356 ◆ Programming ↓ select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-31-nn nnnnn 4. 5. 6. TImer Class1 TImer Classx − + → Enter the Class of Service number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 373
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setup 20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setup to define the Remote Conference options. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Conference Name Enter the name displayed at the time of a Remote Conference. This entry will display on the keyset LCD.
PAGE 374
Program 20 : System Option Setup 20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 20-28 (System Option for Trunk to Trunk Conversations): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 20 28 20-28-01 Continue code back ↑ ↓ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 20-28-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 358 ◆ Programming select → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 375
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls to set the UX5000 options for Outgoing Call Service. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 376
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 07 Toll Restriction Override Time After dialing the Toll Restriction Override codes, the UX5000 removes Toll Restriction from the extension for this interval.
PAGE 377
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 15-01-05 21-01-16 21-01-17 80-03-01 15 Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line Enable or disable the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature.
PAGE 378
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to assign Program 14-06 routes to extensions. Input Data Extension Number Max. 8 digits Item No.
PAGE 379
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 21-02 (Trunk Group Routing for Extensions): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 21 02 21-02-01 TEL301 Mode1 =T.G.R. 1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 21-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 380
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks 21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks to set the Trunk Route Table for Automatic External Call Forward. The Route Table is set in Program 14-06. Input Data Trunk Port Number 1-200 Item No.
PAGE 381
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 21-03 (Trunk Group Routing for Trunks): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 21 03 21-03-01 Trunk1 Mode1 =T.G.R. 1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 21-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Trunknnn − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 382
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions 21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 21-04 : Toll Restriction Class to assign a Toll Restriction class to an extension. The details of Toll Restriction are defined in Program 21-05 and 21-06. Input Data Extension Number Max. 8 digits Item No.
PAGE 383
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 21-04 (Toll Restriction Class for Extensions): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 21 04 21-04-01 TEL301 Mode1 =T/R_Class 2 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 21-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 384
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-05 : Toll Restriction Class 21-05 : Toll Restriction Class Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 21-05 : Toll Restriction Class to set the UX5000’s Toll Restriction classes (1-15). Input Data Toll Restriction Class Number Item No.
PAGE 385
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-05 : Toll Restriction Class Item No. Item Input Data Description Related Program 11 Intercom Call Restriction 0 = Disable 1 = Enable This option determines whether an ICM incoming call is restricted. 12 PBX Call Restriction 0 = Disable 1 = Enable Use this option to set how the UX5000 Toll Restricts calls over PBX trunks. If you enable PBX Toll Restriction, the UX5000 begins Toll Restriction after the PBX access code. The user cannot dial a PBX extension.
PAGE 386
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-05 : Toll Restriction Class Feature Cross Reference ● Toll Restriction Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 21-05 (Toll Restriction Class): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 21 05 21-05-01 Deny TBL1 Int’_Call_Rest.TB0:No back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 21-05-nn Deny TBLnn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 370 ◆ Programming − + → Enter the Deny Table number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 387
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup 21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup to set the UX5000’s Toll Restriction data. Dial 1-9, 0, *, # can be entered in each table. Note: The item numbers indicated below are different when using PCPro/WebPro due to the win- dow layout of the applications.
PAGE 388
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup Item No. Item Table Input Data Default 06 Permit Code Table This option lets you program the Permit Code Tables. If the UX5000 has Toll Restriction enabled, users can dial numbers only if permitted by these tables and the Common Permit Table (21-06-04). There are four Permit Code Tables, with up to 200 entries in each table. The UX5000 permits calls exactly as you enter the code.
PAGE 389
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Toll Restriction Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 21-06 (Toll Restriction Table Data Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 21 06 21-06-01 Int’l TBL 1 IDD_Dial_Rest. TB 001 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 21-06-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 390
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup 21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup to assign Toll Restriction Override codes to extensions. Each code must be four digits long, using any combination of 0-9, # and *. Each extension can have a separate code, or many extensions can share the same override code.
PAGE 391
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 21-07 (Toll Restriction Override Password Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 21 07 21-07-01 TEL301 T/R_Override_ID 1237 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 21-07-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 392
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup 21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup to define the automatic Repeat Dial data. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 0-255 3 01 Repeat Redial Count Set how many times a Repeat Redial will automatically repeat if the call does not go through. 02 Repeat Redial Interval Time This timer sets the interval between Repeat Redial attempts.
PAGE 393
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 21-08 (Repeat Dial Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 21 08 21-08-01 Repeat_Times back ↑ 3. 3 select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 21-08-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. ↓ − + → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 394
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-09 : Dial Block Setup 21-09 : Dial Block Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 21-09 : Dial Block Setup to define the Dial Blocking Toll Restriction Class and Dial Block Password to be used by the Supervisor extension. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Toll Restriction Class With Dial Block Assign a Toll Restriction Class of Service when the Dial Block feature is used.
PAGE 395
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-09 : Dial Block Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 21-09 (Dial Block Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 21 09 21-09-01 D-Block_Rest. 15 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 21-09-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 396
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extensions 21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extensions Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extensions to define the Toll Restriction Class to each extension when the extension is set for Dial Block Restriction. If this data is “0”, Toll Restriction Class follows Program 21-09-01. Input Data Extension Number Max. 8 digit Item No.
PAGE 397
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extensions Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 21-10 (Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extensions): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 21 10 21-10-01 TEL301 D-Block_Class 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 21-10-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 398
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment 21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment to define the Hotline destination number for each extension number. Input Data Extension Number Max. 8 digits Item No.
PAGE 399
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 21-11 (Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 21 11 21-11-01 TEL301 Hotline_No. back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 21-11-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 400
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks 21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks to assign Calling Party Numbers for each trunk (maximum 16 digits per entry).
PAGE 401
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 21-12 (ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 21 12 21-12-01 Trunk1 CLIP_No. back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 21-12-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Trunknnn − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 402
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions 21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions to assign each extension a Calling Party Number (maximum 16 digits per entry). The calling number is the subscriber number of the dial-in number.
PAGE 403
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 21-13 (ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 21 13 21-13-01 TEL301 CLIP_No. back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 21-13-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 404
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup 21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup to assign the password and Toll Restriction Class for Walking Toll Restriction. Each code is six digits long, using any combination of 0-9, # and *. Input Data ID Table Number Item No.
PAGE 405
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 21-14 (Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 21 14 21-14-01 Table1 User_Password back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 21-14-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Tablennn − + → Enter the ID Table number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 406
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Route for Extensions to designate the alternate trunk access route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code. Refer to Program 11-09-02 : Alternate Trunk Access Code when setting up alternate trunk codes.
PAGE 407
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 21-15 (Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 21 15 21-15-01 TEL301 Mode1 -T.G.R. 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 21-15-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 408
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networks 21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networks Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networks to assign Program 14-06 routes for a networked system. This is required to seize the trunk in a networked system (Extension in System A tries to make an external call using a trunk in System B). The route number is specified for each system ID (01-50).
PAGE 409
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networks Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 21-16 (Trunk Group Routing for Networks): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 21 16 21-16-01 SysID1 Mode1 -RouteTbl1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 21-16-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. SysIDnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 410
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-17 : IP (H.323/SIP) Trunk Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks 21-17 : IP (H.323/SIP) Trunk Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 21-17 : IP (H.
PAGE 411
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-17 : IP (H.323/SIP) Trunk Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 21-17 (IP (H.323/SIP) Trunk Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 21 17 21-17-01 Trunk1 PartyNo back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 21-17-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Trunk1 − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 412
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-18 : IP (H.323) Trunk Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions 21-18 : IP (H.323) Trunk Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions Level: Feature Availability IN • Available.
PAGE 413
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-18 : IP (H.323) Trunk Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 21-18 : IP (H.323) Trunk Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 21 18 21-18-01 Tel301 PartyNo back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 21-18-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Tel301 − + → Enter the extension number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 414
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-19 : IP (SIP) Trunk Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions 21-19 : IP (SIP) Trunk Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions Level: Feature Availability IN • Available.
PAGE 415
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-19 : IP (SIP) Trunk Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 21-19 : IP (SIP) Trunk Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 21 19 21-19-01 Tel301 PartyNo back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 21-19-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Tel301 − + → Enter the extension number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 416
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-21 : Toll Restriction Class for Trunks 21-21 : Toll Restriction Class for Trunks Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 21-21 : Toll Restriction Class for Trunks to assign a Toll Restriction level to each trunk. When both an extension (21-04-01) and a trunk (25-11-04 / 34-04-01) have a Toll Restriction level assigned, the higher class will apply for outgoing calls.
PAGE 417
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-21 : Toll Restriction Class for Trunks Feature Cross Reference ● Toll Restriction Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 21-21 : Toll Restrction Class for Trunks: 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 21 21 21-21-01 Trunk1 Model1 =T/R Class 1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 21-21-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Trunkx − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 418
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup 21-21 : Toll Restriction Class for Trunks - For Your Notes - 402 ◆ Programming UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 419
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls to define the UX5000 options for incoming calls. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 420
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls Item No. 10 Input Data Default Description Related Program 0=Automatic 1=Change by manual operation 0 This program sets up the operation mode for Auto Attendant and Queuing Message. 15-07 20-15-11 22-01-04 22-04 22-08 22-14 22-15 Item VRS Waiting Message Operation If there is no response during the fixed time for a call, the waiting message is sent to the caller until a response is received.
PAGE 421
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup 22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup to assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk. There is one item for each Night Service Mode. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No.
PAGE 422
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 22-02 (Incoming Service Type Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 22 02 22-02-01 Mode1 =0:Normal back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 22-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 406 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 423
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range 22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range to select the ring tone range for the trunk. The trunk uses a ring tone within the range selected when it rings an extension. There are four ring tones available. Customize the Trunk Ring Tones in Program 82-01. Input Data Trunk Port Number 1-200 Item No.
PAGE 424
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range Feature Cross Reference ● Selectable Ring Tones Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 22-03 (Trunk Ring Tone Range): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 22 03 22-03-01 Trunk1 TRK_Ring_Tone 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 22-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 408 ◆ Programming Trunknnn − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 425
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment 22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Level: Feature Availability SA • Available - 100 Ring Groups. Description Use Program 22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment to assign extensions to Ring Groups. Calls ring extensions according to Ring Group programming. Use Program 22-05 to assign trunks to Ring Groups and use Program 22-06 to set the ringing for the terminals.
PAGE 426
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 22-04 (Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 22 04 22-04-01 INC Group1 IRG 01=301 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 22-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 410 ◆ Programming INC Groupnnn − + → Enter the Incoming Ring Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 427
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment 22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment Level: Feature Availability IN • Available - 100 Ring Groups. Description Use Program 22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment to assign trunks to incoming Ring Groups. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No.
PAGE 428
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 22-05 (Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 22 05 22-05-01 Trunk1 Mode1 =1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 22-05-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 412 ◆ Programming Trunknnn − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 429
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode 22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode to define whether or not an extension should ring for the Normal Incoming Ring Mode. Input Data Extension Number Max. 8 digits Item No.
PAGE 430
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 22-06 (Normal Incoming Ring Mode): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 22 06 22-06-01 TEL301 Mode1 =1:Ring On back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 22-06-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 414 ◆ Programming TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 431
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-07 : DIL Assignment 22-07 : DIL Assignment Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 22-07 : DIL Assignment to assign the destination extension or Department Calling Group pilot # (as assigned in Program 11-07) for each DIL Incoming trunk. A DIL rings an extension directly, without any other Access Map or Ring Group programming. If an extension has a line key, the DIL rings the line key.
PAGE 432
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-07 : DIL Assignment Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 22-07 (DIL Assignment): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 22 07 22-07-01 Trunk1 Mode1 = back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 22-07-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 416 ◆ Programming Trunknnn − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 433
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination 22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description For DIL Delayed Ringing, use Program 22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination to assign the DIL No Answer Ring Group. An unanswered DIL rings this group after the DIL No Answer Time expires (Program 22-01-04). DIL Delayed Ringing can also reroute outside calls ringing a Ring Group. You make eight assignments, one for each Night Service mode.
PAGE 434
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 22-08 (DIL/IRG No Answer Destination): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 22 08 22-08-01 Trunk1 Mode1 =1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 22-08-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 418 ◆ Programming Trunknnn − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 435
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup 22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of Dial-In incoming calls for each trunk group. Input Data Trunk Group Number 001-100 Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Expected Number of Digits Enter the number of digits the table expects to receive from the telco.
PAGE 436
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 22-09 (DID Basic Data Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 22 09 22-09-01 Trk Group 1 DDI_Rcv.Digit 4digit back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 22-09-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 420 ◆ Programming Trk Groupnnn − + → Enter the trunk group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 437
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup 22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup to specify the size of the DID Translation Tables. There are 2000 Translation Table entries that you can allocate among 20 Translation Tables. Conditions None Input Data Conversion Table Area Number Item No.
PAGE 438
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 22-10 (DID Translation Table Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 22 10 22-10-01 Conv Area1 No.1_Start_Add1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 22-10-nn Conv Areann nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 422 ◆ Programming − + → Enter the Conversion Table Area number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 439
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion 22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 22-11 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion to specify for each Translation Table entry (2000): ● The digits received by the UX5000 (eight max.) ● The extension the UX5000 dials after translation (24 digits max.) ● The name that should show on the dialed extension’s display when it rings (twelve characters max.
PAGE 440
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion Input Data Conversion Table Number Item No. Item 1-2000 Input Data Default 01 Received Number Max. 8 digits No setting 02 Target Number Max. 24 digits No setting 03 DID Name Max.
PAGE 441
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 22-11 (DID Translation Number Conversion): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 22 11 22-11-01 Conv TBL 1 Received_Dial back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 22-11-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 442
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description For each DID Translation Table, use Program 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group to define the first destination group for DID calls.
PAGE 443
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 22-12 (DID Intercept Ring Group): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 22 12 22-12-01 Conv Area1 Mode1 =1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 22-12-nn Conv Areann nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. − + → Enter the Conversion Table Area number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 444
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment 22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment to assign the DID Trunk Groups to DID Translation Tables. DID trunks should be in their own group. If you have more than one type of DID trunk, put each type in a separate Trunk Group.
PAGE 445
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 22-13 (DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 22 13 22-13-01 Trk Group 1 Mode1 =1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 22-13-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Trk Groupnnn − + → Enter the trunk Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 446
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG 22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG to define for each incoming ring group the timers, VRS message number and tone kind for VRS Waiting Message. Input Data Incoming Ring Group Number Item No.
PAGE 447
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 22-14 (VRS Delayed Message for IRG): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 22 14 22-14-01 INC Group1 MSG1_Str.Time 0 Sec. back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 22-14-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. INC Groupnnn − + → Enter the Incoming Ring Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 448
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-15 : VRS Waiting Message for Department Group 22-15 : VRS Waiting Message for Department Group Level: Feature Availability IN • Available - 64 Department Groups. Description Use Program 22-15 : VRS Waiting Message for Department Group to define for each Department (Extension) Group the timers, VRS message number and tone kind for VRS Waiting Message. Input Data Extension (Department) Group Number Item No.
PAGE 449
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-15 : VRS Waiting Message for Department Group Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 22-15 (VRS Waiting Message for Department Group): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 22 15 22-15-01 Extn Group1 MSG1_Str.Time 0 Sec. back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 22-15-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Extn Groupnn − + → Enter the Department Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 450
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup 22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup to define the ABB group number for Private Call Refuse. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Abbreviated Dial Group Number Define the ABB group number for Private Call Refuse.
PAGE 451
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 22-18 (Private Call Assignment): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 22 18 22-18-01 Trans mode 0:Not Used back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 22-18-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. → Enter the Department Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 452
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-17 : DID Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern Mode 22-17 : DID Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern Mode Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 22-17 : DID Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern Mode to define the times and DID Conversion Table (Program 22-11) for each DID time pattern (1-8). Input Data Conversion Table: 001-100 Received Number: 8 Digits Item No.
PAGE 453
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-17 : DID Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern Mode Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 22-17 (DID Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern Mode): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 22 17 22-17-01 Conv TBL 1 Receive No back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 22-17-nn Conv Tbl 1 Receive No nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. − + → Enter the Conversion Table number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 454
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-18 : Private Call Assignment 22-18 : Private Call Assignment Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 22-18 : Private Call Assignment to defines assignments and incoming ring patterns for a Private Call. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 0 = Not defined 1 = Internal dial 2 = Incoming Ring Group (IRG) 0 14-01-27 15-02-02 40-10-06 01 Transfer Mode If this program is set to 0, the VRS message is played.
PAGE 455
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-18 : Private Call Assignment Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 22-18 (Private Call Assignment): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 22 18 22-18-01 Trans mode 0:Not Used back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 22-18-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. → Enter the Department Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 456
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Per Time Pattern 22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Per Time Pattern Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Per Time Pattern to set if the Flexible Ringing by Caller ID function is activated per time pattern mode. Input Data Trunk Port Number: 001-200 Day/Night Mode: 1-8 Item No.
PAGE 457
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Per Time Pattern Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 22-20 (Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Per Time Pattern): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 22 20 22-20-01 Mode 1 ↑ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 22-20-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. ↓ Trunk1 1:Yes select Trunkn → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 458
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup 22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Per Time Pattern - For Your Notes - 442 ◆ Programming UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 459
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup 23-02 : Call Pickup Groups Program 23 : Answer Features Setup 23-02 : Call Pickup Groups Level: Feature Availability IN • Available - 64 Call Pickup Groups. Description Use Program 23-02 : Call Pickup Groups to assign extensions to Call Pickup Groups. This program also lets you assign an extension’s Call Pickup Group priority. If two extensions in a group are ringing at the same time, Group Call Pickup intercepts the highest priority extension first.
PAGE 460
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup 23-02 : Call Pickup Groups Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 23-02 (Call Pickup Groups): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 23 02 23-02-01 TEL301 Call_Pickup_GP1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 23-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 444 ◆ Programming TELnnn − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 461
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup 23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer 23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer to assign trunk routes (set in Program 14-06) to extensions for Universal Answer. If the call ringing the paging system is in an extension’s assigned route, the user can dial the Universal Answer code (843) to pick up the call.
PAGE 462
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup 23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 23-03 (Universal Answer/Auto Answer): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 23 03 23-03-01 TEL301 Mode1 Route=0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 23-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 446 ◆ Programming TELnnn − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 463
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup 23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions 23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions Level: Feature Availability IN • Available - 256 virtual extension ports. Description Use Program 23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions to set the off-hook automatic response priority for calls ringing virtual extension keys on a terminal. Input Data Extension Number Item No.
PAGE 464
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup 23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 23-04 (Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 23 04 23-04-01 TEL301 Order1 STG_Group =0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 23-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 448 ◆ Programming TELnnn − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 465
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-01 : System Options for Hold Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-01 : System Options for Hold Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 24-01 : System Options for Hold to define the UX5000 options for the Hold feature. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Hold Recall Time A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this interval.
PAGE 466
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-01 : System Options for Hold Feature Cross Reference ● ● Hold Park Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 24-01 (System Options for Hold): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 24 01 24-01-01 Hold_Recall back ↑ 3. ← 450 ◆ Programming ↓ Sec. select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 24-01-nn nnnnn 4. 5. 90 → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 467
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-02 : System Options for Transfer 24-02 : System Options for Transfer Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 24-02 : System Options for Transfer to define the UX5000 options for Transfer feature. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Busy Transfer Use this option to prevent or allow extensions to Transfer calls to busy extensions.
PAGE 468
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-02 : System Options for Transfer 09 ISDN Transfer Resend Timer Determine how long the UX5000 should resend a Facility Message to the currently active PRI trunk when the 2 B-Channel Transfer feature is used. The UX5000 will resend the Facility timer based on this timer. If there is no response after the 3rd resend, the UX5000 considers the transfer as failed and stops resending.
PAGE 469
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-02 : System Options for Transfer Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 24-02 (System Options for Transfer): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 24 02 24-02-01 Busy_Ext.TRFR 0:No back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 24-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. − + → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 470
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-03 : Park Group 24-03 : Park Group Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 24-03 : Park Group to assign an extension to a Park Group. The UX5000 allows a total of 64 Park Groups. An extension can only pick up a call parked in orbit by an extension in its own group. Input Data Extension Number Item No. Park Group Number Default 01 1-64 1 Max. 8 digits Description Assign an extension to a Park Group.
PAGE 471
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-03 : Park Group Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 24-03 (Park Group): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 24 03 24-03-01 TEL301 Park_Hold_Group 1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 24-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. TELnnn − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 472
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup 24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup to assign the Abbreviated Dialing number bin which should be used as the destination of the Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer. Input Data Trunk Port Number 1-200 Item No.
PAGE 473
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 24-04 (Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 24 04 24-04-01 Trk Port 1 Mode1 Abb.D_Area=1999 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 24-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Trk Port nnn − + → Enter the trunk port number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 474
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup 24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available - 64 Department Groups. Description Use Program 24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup to assign the Abbreviated Dialing bin which is used as the destination of the extension for the Department Group. Input Data Department Group Number 01-64 Item No.
PAGE 475
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 24-05 (Department Group Transfer Target Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 24 05 24-05-01 Extn Group1 Mode1 Abb.D_Area=1999 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 24-05-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Extn Groupnn − + → Enter the Extension (Department) Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 476
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-06 : Fixed Call Forwarding 24-06 : Fixed Call Forwarding Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description For each extension/virtual extension port, use Program 24-06 : Fixed Call Forwarding to assign the Fixed Call Forwarding Type (0-4) and the destination extension/virtual extension. For extension ports, the Fixed Call Forwarding destination can be an on- or off-premise extension or a Voice Mail extension.
PAGE 477
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-06 : Fixed Call Forwarding Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 24-06 (Fixed Call Forwarding): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 24 06 24-06-01 TEL301 Fix_C/F_Type0:None back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 24-06-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 478
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-07 : Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise 24-07 : Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 24-07 : Fixed Call Forwarding Off Premise to assign the Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise telephone number for each extension. The off-premise destination can be up to 24 digits long, using 0-9, *, # and P (pause). Be sure to include the trunk access code (e.g., 9) in the number. Input Data Extension Number Item No.
PAGE 479
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-07 : Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 24-07 (Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 24 07 24-07-01 TEL301 Dial = back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 24-07-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 480
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-08 : Call Forwarding with Centrex 24-08 : Call Forwarding with Centrex Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 24-08 : Call Forwarding with Centrex to set the options for the feature. Input Data Extension Number Item No. Off-Premise Destination Number 01 Forwarding Type Use this program to define the type of Call Forwarding for Centrex for each extension required.
PAGE 481
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-08 : Call Forwarding with Centrex Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 24-08 (Call Forwarding with Centrex): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 24 08 24-08-01 TEL301301 Cfwd Type 0:None back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 24-08-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 482
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup 24-08 : Call Forwarding with Centrex - For Your Notes - 466 ◆ Programming UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 483
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of each VRS/ DISA line. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No. Item 01 VRS/DISA Dial-In Mode 02 DISA User ID Determine if a DISA user ID is required.
PAGE 484
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 25-01 (VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 25 01 25-01-01 Trk Port 1 Dial-In_Mode 0:Intercom back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 25-01-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 468 ◆ Programming Trk Portnnn − + → Enter the trunk port number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 485
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-02 : VRS/DISA VRS Message 25-02 : VRS/DISA VRS Message Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 25-02 : VRS/DISA VRS Message to assign the VRS message number to be used as the Automated Attendant Message for each trunk which is assigned as a VRS/DISA. Input Data Trunk Port Number 1-200 Item No.
PAGE 486
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-02 : VRS/DISA VRS Message Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 25-02 (VRS/DISA VRS Message): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 25 02 25-02-01 Trk Port 1 Mode1 Talkie=0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 25-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 470 ◆ Programming Trk Portnnn − + → Enter the trunk port number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 487
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing 25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing to set what happens to a call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller dials incorrectly or waits too long to dial. The call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination (a ring group or voice mail).
PAGE 488
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 25-03 (VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 25 03 25-03-01 Trk Port 1 Mode1 Target_IRG=0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 25-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 489
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy to set the operating mode of each VRS/DISA trunk. This sets what happens to the call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller calls a busy or unanswered extension.
PAGE 490
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 25-04 (VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 25 04 25-04-01 Trk Port 1 Mode1 Target_IRG=0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 25-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 474 ◆ Programming Trk Portnnn − + → Enter the trunk port number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 491
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment 25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment to assign the VRS message number to be used as the Automated Attendant error message. For each VRS/DISA trunk that the VRS will answer, enter the VRS message (1-100) the outside caller hears if they dial incorrectly. If you enter 0 (i.e.
PAGE 492
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 25-05 (VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 25 05 25-05-01 Trk Port 1 Mode1 Error_MSG=0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 25-05-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 476 ◆ Programming Trk Port nnn − + → Enter the trunk port number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 493
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup 25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup to set up single digit dialing through the VRS. This gives VRS callers single key access to extensions, the company operator, Department Calling Groups and Voice Mail.
PAGE 494
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup Conditions Outside caller may not be able to dial individual extensions or lines if the same first digit is defined here. Feature Cross Reference ● ● Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Voice Response System (VRS) Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 25-06 (VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 25 06 25-06-01 Guidance1 Rcv’d 1 MSG 1 back ↑ ↓ select 3.
PAGE 495
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA 25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA to set the value for the UX5000 timers which affect VRS, DID and DISA. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 496
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA Item No. 08 Item Long Conversation Disconnect This timer determines how long the UX5000 will wait before disconnecting a DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking) conversation call after the Long Conversation tone is heard. Input Data Default Related Program 0-64800 seconds 10 14-01-25 20-28-01 20-28-02 20-28-03 20-31-20 25-07-07 This program has no affect if Program 25-07-07 is set to "0".
PAGE 497
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 25-07 (System Timers for VRS/DISA): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 25 07 25-07-01 VRS_Dial_Tone10 Sec. back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 25-07-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 498
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-08 : DISA User ID Setup 25-08 : DISA User ID Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 25-08 : DISA User ID Setup to set the 6-digit DISA password for each user. There are 15 users each with one 6-digit password. Input Data DISA User Number 1-15 Item No.
PAGE 499
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users 25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users to set the DISA Class of Service for each user. When a DISA caller enters a password (defined in Program 25-08), the UX5000 identifies the user and associates the appropriate DISA Class of Service with the call. Assign the DISA Class of Service options in Program 20-14.
PAGE 500
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 25-09 (Class of Service for DISA Users): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 25 09 25-09-01 DISA User1 Mode1 DISA_Class 1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 25-09-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 484 ◆ Programming DISA Usernn − + → Enter the DISA user number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 501
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA 25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA to assign the Trunk Group route chosen when a user places a DISA call into the UX5000 and dials 9. Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-06. Enable or disable the DISA caller’s ability to dial 9 in Program 20-14-02. You assign a route to each DISA Class of Service (1-15).
PAGE 502
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 25-10 (Trunk Group Routing for DISA): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 25 10 25-10-01 DISA User1 Mode1 DISA_Route No.1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 25-10-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 486 ◆ Programming DISA Usernn − + → Enter the DISA user number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 503
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class 25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description For UX5000s that use Toll Restriction, use Program 25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class to assign a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to each DISA user (1-15). The UX5000 uses the Toll Restriction Class you enter in Program 21-05 and 21-06.
PAGE 504
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 25-11 (DISA Toll Restriction Class): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 25 11 25-11-01 DISA User1 Mode1 DISA_T/R_Class2 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 25-11-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 488 ◆ Programming DISA Usernn − + → Enter the DISA user number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 505
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA 25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA to define the trunk route selected when a DISA caller dials the Alternate Trunk Access Code. The route selected is based on the DISA caller’s Class of Service, which is in turn determined by the password the caller dials.
PAGE 506
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 25-12 (Individual Trunk Group Routing for DISA): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 25 12 25-12-01 DISA User1 Mode1 DISA_Route_No.1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 25-12-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 490 ◆ Programming DISA Usernn − + → Enter the DISA user number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 507
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-13 : System Option for DISA 25-13 : System Option for DISA Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 25-13 : System Option for DISA to enter the password DISA callers must dial before the UX5000 will allow them to record, listen to and or erase the VRS messages. This program also is used to define additional DISA call options. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 508
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup 25-13 : System Option for DISA Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 25-13 (System Option for DISA): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 25 13 25-13-01 VRS_MSG_Access_ID back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 25-13-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 492 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 509
Program 26 : ARS Service 26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service Program 26 : ARS Service 26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service to define the UX5000 options for Automatic Route Selection (ARS). Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Programs 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 26-02 26-03 26-04 01 ARS Service Enable or disable ARS.
PAGE 510
Program 26 : ARS Service 26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Automatic Route Selection Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 26-01 (Automatic Route Selection Service): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 26 01 26-01-01 ARS Service back ↑ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 26-01-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 494 ◆ Programming 0:Off ↓ select → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 511
Program 26 : ARS Service 26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR 26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR to set pre-transaction tables for selecting Automatic Route Selection (ARS). ● Service Type 1 (Route to Trunk Group Number) - The number routes to a trunk group. ● Service Type 2 (F-Route Selected) - The number is controlled by the F-Route table.
PAGE 512
Program 26 : ARS Service 26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Automatic Route Selection Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 26-02 (Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 26 02 26-02-01 Analysis Tbl1 Dial back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 26-02-nn Analysis Tbln nnnnn ← 4. 5. 496 ◆ Programming − + → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 513
Program 26 : ARS Service 26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments 26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments to assign the 15 Dial Treatments for automatic ARS dialing translation. Assign Dial Treatments to Service Numbers (Trunk Groups) in Program 26-02. The ARS Dial Treatment options are: ● 3 - Delete the NPA if dialed as part of the initial call. Requires at least 8 digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).
PAGE 514
Program 26 : ARS Service 26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments Feature Cross Reference ● Automatic Route Selection Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 26-03 (ARS Dial Treatments): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 26 03 26-03-01 ARS Treatment1 back 3. ↑ ↓ select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 26-03-nn ARS Treatmentn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 498 ◆ Programming − + → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 515
Program 26 : ARS Service 26-04 : ARS Class of Service 26-04 : ARS Class of Service Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 26-04 : ARS Class of Service to set an extension’s ARS Class of Service. Automatic Route Selection uses ARS Class of Service when determining how to route an extension’s calls. Input Data Extension Number Up to 8 digits Item No.
PAGE 516
Program 26 : ARS Service 26-05 : LCR Carrier Table 26-05 : LCR Carrier Table Level: Feature Availability IN • Not Available. Description This item is not currently used in the U.S.
PAGE 517
Program 26 : ARS Service 26-06 : LCR Authorization Table 26-06 : LCR Authorization Table Level: IN Feature Availability • Not Available. Description This item is not currently used in the U.S.
PAGE 518
Program 26 : ARS Service 26-07 : LCR Cost Center Code Table 26-07 : LCR Cost Center Code Table Level: Feature Availability IN • Not Available. Description This item is not currently used in the U.S.
PAGE 519
Program 26 : ARS Service 26-08 : LCR Manual Override Access Code Table 26-08 : LCR Manual Override Access Code Table Level: IN Feature Availability • Not Available. Description This item is not currently used in the U.S.
PAGE 520
Program 26 : ARS Service 26-09 : LCR Manual Override Exemption Table 26-09 : LCR Manual Override Exemption Table Level: Feature Availability IN • Not Available. Description This item is not currently used in the U.S.
PAGE 521
Program 26 : ARS Service 26-11 : Transit Network ID Table 26-11 : Transit Network ID Table Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 26-11 : Transit Network ID Table to enter up to four Transit Network ID Codes, each being 4 numbers long. Input Data Transit Network ID Codes 1-4 Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Carrier ID Enter the Transit Network Selection information element to be added to an ARS call using an ISDN trunk.
PAGE 522
Program 26 : ARS Service 26-11 : Transit Network ID Table Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 26-11 (Transit Network ID Table): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 26 11 26-11-01 TBL 1301 Carrier ID back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 26-11-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 506 ◆ Programming TBL 1nnn − + → Enter the table number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 523
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode to set the mode of the UX5000’s DSS Consoles. The entry you make in this option applies to all the UX5000’s DSS Consoles. The available options are: ● Regular (Business) Mode (0) This option indicates the status of normal keysets (not ACD agents).
PAGE 524
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode Feature Cross Reference ● ● Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Hotel/Motel Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 30-01 (DSS Console Operating Mode): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 30 01 30-01-01 Operation_Mode0:Business back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 30-01-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 508 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 525
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment 30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment to identify which extensions have DSS Consoles connected. ● You can have up to 32 different extensions with DSS Consoles. A single extension can have any number of 60-Button DSS Consoles (32 is the maximum allowed per system).
PAGE 526
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 30-02 (DSS Console Extension Assignment): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 30 02 30-02-01 DSS1 Ext.Number back ↑ ↓ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 30-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 510 ◆ Programming select DSSnn − + → Enter the DSS number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 527
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment Level: SA Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignments to customize the key assignments for 60-Button DSS Consoles. This program is also used to define Aspire 110-Button DSS Consoles if used on the UX5000. The DSS Console keys can be programmed using any of the function codes listed below.
PAGE 528
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment Function Number List [1] General functional level (00 – 99) Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication 00 Not Used 01 DSS / One-Touch 02 Microphone Key (ON/OFF) Red On: Mic On Off: Mic Off 03 DND Key Red On: DND 04 BGM (ON/OFF) Red On: BGM On Off: BGM Off 05 Headset Red On: Under headset operation 06 Transfer Key None 07 Conference Key Red On: Under conference operation 08 Incoming Call Log Rapid B
PAGE 529
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication 18 Text Message Setup Message Numbers (01-20) Red On: Feature active by Function Key 19 External Group Paging External Paging Number (1-8) Red On: Active 20 External All Call Paging 21 Internal Group Paging 22 Internal All Call Paging None 23 Meet-Me Answer to Internal Paging None 24 Call Pickup None 25 Call Pickup for Another Group None 26 Call Pickup fo
PAGE 530
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment Function Number Function Additional Data 42 Boss – Secretary Call 43 Series Call None 44 Common Hold None 45 Exclusive None 46 Department Group Log Out Red On: Logged Out 47 Reverse Voice Over 48 Voice Over 49 Call Redirect 50 Account Code 51 General Purpose Relay Relay No (0, 1-8) Red On: Relay On 52 Incoming Call Queuing Setup Incoming Group Number Red On: Under setting 53 Queuing Message Starting Red
PAGE 531
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication 60 Department Incoming Call DND 61 ID Entry - Not Used - 63 Outgoing Call Without Caller ID (ISDN) Red On: Active 64 Key Pad Facility Red On: Active 65 Not Used 66 CTI 67 - Not Used in the U.S. - 68 - Not Used in the U.S. - 69 - Not Used in the U.S. - 70 - Not Used in the U.S. - 71 - Not Used in the U.S.
PAGE 532
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication 83 Live Record Function 84 Drop Key 85 Directory Dialing 86 Set Private Call Refuse This key enables/disables the “Private” call refusal for the trunks set to "1" in Program 14-01-27. Slow Blink (Red): Active 87 Set Caller ID Refuse This key enables/disables the Caller ID number refusal for the trunks set to "1" in Program 14-01-27.
PAGE 533
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment Function Number Function 95 Page Switching A console can have two ranges of keys. This key allows the operator to switch from Range1 to Range 2. This key can only be assigned to keys 55-60. 97 Intercom Key Assign the extension to be called when this key is pressed. 98 Message Waiting Indication This key allows the operator to view which extensions have Message Waiting indications.
PAGE 534
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment [2] Appearance Function Level (*00 - *99) (Service Code 852) Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication DESI-Less Names Displayed *00 Not Used *01 Trunk Key Trunk Number (001-200) Red On: Trunk busy by another user Green On: Trunk busy by extension LINE XXX *02 Trunk Group/Loop Key Trunk Group Number (001-100) Red On: Trunk busy by another user Green On: Trunk busy by extension TKGPXXX *03 Virtual Extension
PAGE 535
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment *13 ACD Off Duty Mode Red On: Under off duty Slow Blink (Red): Under reservation - *14 ACD Start / End Red On: ACD operation end - *15 ACD Monitor Mode - Terminal Red On: Under monitor - *16 ACD Standby Mode Red On: Standby - *17 ACD Wrap-Up Mode Red On: Under work time Slow Blink (Red): Under reservation - *18 ACD Overflow Control Red On: Enable Slow Blink (Red): Disable - *19 ACD Queue Status Display Check ACD
PAGE 536
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 30-03 (DSS Console Key Assignment): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 30 03 30-03-01 DSS1 KY001= 01 back ↑ ↓ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 30-03-01 DSS1 KY01 = 01 back ↑ ↓ 4. 5. 6. 520 ◆ Programming select select Enter the DSS number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 537
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-04 : Alternate DSS Console Extension Assignment 30-04 : Alternate DSS Console Extension Assignment Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 30-04 : Alternate DSS Console Extension Assignment to identify the alternate DSS console extension use when in off-duty mode (by pressing ALT key on the DSS console). Input Data DSS Console Number 01-32 Item No.
PAGE 538
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-04 : Alternate DSS Console Extension Assignment Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 30-04 (Alternate DSS Console Extension Assignment): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 30 04 30-04-01 DSS1 TRANSFER DSS NO ← 3. − + 0 → Enter the number of the item you want to program. 30-04-nn nnnnn ← DSSnn − + → 4. Enter the DSS number to be programmed or press the FLASH key, then use the VOLUME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ keys. 5. 6.
PAGE 539
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table 30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table to define the LED patterns for functions on the DSS consoles. This program will also affect the lamping for DSS/Hotline keys on keysets. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 540
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● 524 ◆ Programming Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 541
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 30-05 (DSS Console Lamp Table): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 30 05 30-05-01 Ext.Number back ↑ 3. select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 30-05-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. ↓ → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 542
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-10 : DSS Console IP Terminal Setup 30-10 : DSS Console IP Terminal Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 30-10 : DSS Console IP Terminal Setup to display the MAC address of the terminal for the DSS console connected with the SIP multi-line terminal. Input Data DSS Console Number 01-32 Item No.
PAGE 543
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-10 : DSS Console IP Terminal Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 30-10 (DSS Console IP Terminal Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 30 10 30-10-01 DSS1 MAC 00-00-00-00-00-00 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 30-10-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. → Enter the DSS Console number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 544
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup 30-10 : DSS Console IP Terminal Setup - For Your Notes - 528 ◆ Programming UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 545
Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging to define the UX5000 options for Internal/External Paging. The UX5000 shows the names you program on the terminal displays. Use the following chart when entering and editing text.
PAGE 546
Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default Description Related Program 01 All Call Paging Zone Name Up to 12 Characters Group all Assign a name to each All Call Internal Paging zone. The name shows on the display of the terminal making the announcement. 11-12-19 31-02-02 02 Page Announcement Duration 0-64800 (Sec.) 1200 This timer sets the maximum length of Page announcements.
PAGE 547
Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment 31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment to assign extensions to Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The setting in this program also determines if the Internal Page Group can receive Internal All Call Paging. The UX5000 can have up to 64 paging groups. An extension can be in only one Internal Paging Group.
PAGE 548
Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment Feature Cross Reference ● Paging, Internal Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 31-02 (Internal Paging Group Assignment): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 31 02 31-02-01 TEL301 INT_PG_GP_No. 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 31-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 532 ◆ Programming TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 549
Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings 31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings to assign names to Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones) and to define the splash tone for Internal Paging. The UX5000 shows the names you program on the terminal displays. Use the following chart when entering and editing text.
PAGE 550
Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings Input data Internal Paging Group Number Item No. Item Input Data 01 Internal Paging Group Name Up to 12 Characters 02 Internal Paging Splash Tone 0 = Ordinary volume 1 = Mute 2 = No tone 01-64 Default Description Assign names to Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The UX5000 shows the names you program on the terminal displays.
PAGE 551
Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 31-03 (Internal Paging Group Settings): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 10 03 10-03-01 Paging 1 PG_GP_Name =GROUP 1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 10-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Paging nn − + → Enter the Internal Paging Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 552
Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-04 : External Paging Zone Group 31-04 : External Paging Zone Group Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 31-04 : External Paging Zone Group to assign each External Paging zone to an External Paging group. Users call the External Paging group when broadcasting announcements to the external zone. When programming, the zones on the PGDAD adapter are numbers 1-8. On the UX5000, the CCPU’s zone is number 9.
PAGE 553
Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-04 : External Paging Zone Group Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 31-04 (External Paging Zone Group): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 31 04 31-04-01 SPK 1 Paging_Zone_GP1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 31-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. SPK n − + → Enter the External Speaker number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 554
Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page 31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 31-05 : Universal Night Answer to assign Universal Night Answer ringing to each External Paging zone. For each trunk port, you make a separate entry for each External Paging zone. When programming, the zones on the PGDAD adapter are numbers 1-8. The CCPU’s zone is number 9.
PAGE 555
Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 31-05 (Universal Night Answer): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 31 05 31-05-01 Trunk1 SPK 1Mod1 =0:No back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 31-05-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Trunknnn − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 556
Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-06 : External Speaker Control 31-06 : External Speaker Control Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 31-06 : External Speaker Control to define the settings for the external speaker using an amplifier. Input Data External Speaker Number 1-9 Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Broadcast Splash Tone Before Paging Use this option to enabled or disable splash tone before Paging over an external zone.
PAGE 557
Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-06 : External Speaker Control Feature Cross Reference ● Paging, External Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 31-06 (External Speaker Control): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 31 06 31-06-01 SPK 1 PG_Start_Tone 2:Chime back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 31-06-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. SPK n − + → Enter the External Speaker number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 558
Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments 31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments to assign an External Paging Group (0-8) to an Internal Paging Zone (0-64) for Combined Paging. When an extension user makes a Combined Page, they simultaneously broadcast into both the External and Internal Zone.
PAGE 559
Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 31-07 (Combined Paging Assignments): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 31 07 31-07-01 PG Group 1 Internal_PG-GP_No. 1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 31-07-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. PG Group n − + → Enter the Page Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 560
Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-08 : BGM on External Paging 31-08 : BGM on External Paging Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 31-08 : BGM on External Paging to set the Background Music option for each External Paging zone. If enabled, the UX5000 will play Background Music over the zone when it is idle. When programming, the zones on the PGDAD adapter are numbers 1-8. For the UX5000, the CCPU’s zone is number 9. Input Data External Speaker Number 1-9 Item No.
PAGE 561
Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-08 : BGM on External Paging Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 31-08 (BGM on External Paging): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 31 08 31-08-01 SPK 1 BGM 0:No back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 31-08-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. SPK n − + → Enter the External Speaker number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 562
Program 31 : Paging Setup 31-08 : BGM on External Paging - For Your Notes - 546 ◆ Programming UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 563
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup 32-01 : Door Box Timers Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup 32-01 : Door Box Timers Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 32-01 : Door Box Timers to assign the timers used for the Door Box. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Door Box Answer Time A keyset user must answer Door Box chimes within this interval.
PAGE 564
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup 32-01 : Door Box Timers Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 32-01 (Door Box Timers): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 32 01 32-01-01 DH_Ans. Time 30 Sec. back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 32-01-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 548 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 565
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup 32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment 32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignments to assign the extension which will ring when a caller presses the associated Door Box’s call button. Input Data Door Box Number 1-8 Day/Night Mode 1-8 Item No. Door Box Ring Group Number Extension Number Default 01 01-32 Max.
PAGE 566
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup 32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 32-02 (Door Box Ring Assignment): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 32 02 32-02-01 DOOR 1 Mode1 TEL 01= back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 32-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 550 ◆ Programming DOOR n − + → Enter the Door Box number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 567
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup 32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup 32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup to select the chime pattern and gain level for each Door Box. There are six distinctive chime patterns. The chime tones are defined in Program 80-01. Input Data Door Box Number Item No.
PAGE 568
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup 32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 32-03 (Door Box Basic Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 32 03 32-03-01 DOOR 1 Chime_Pattern 1:Ring1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 32-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 552 ◆ Programming DOOR n − + → Enter the Door Box number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 569
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup 32-04 : Door Box Name Setup 32-04 : Door Box Name Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 32-04 : Door Box Name Setup to select the name of each Door Box. Input Data Door Box Number Item No.
PAGE 570
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup 32-04 : Door Box Name Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 32-04 (Door Box Name Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 32 04 32-04-01 DOOR 1 Door Name -DOOR- 1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 32-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 554 ◆ Programming DOOR n − + → Enter the Door Box number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 571
Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup 33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup 33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup to set the function of each software port on an Analog Communications Interface. Each ACI software port can have only one function (input, output or none). Input Data ACI Port Number Item No.
PAGE 572
Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup 33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 33-01 (ACI Port Type Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 33 01 33-01-01 ACI Port1 ACI_Type 2:In/Out back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 33-01-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 556 ◆ Programming ACI Portnn − + → Enter the ACI port number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 573
Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup 33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group 33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group Level: Feature Availability IN • Available - ACI Ports and 16 ACI Department Groups. Description Use Program 33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group to assign ACI ports to Department Groups. An ACI port can only be in one group. Also use this program to set the ACI port’s priority. When a call comes into the ACI Department Group, it connects to the ACI port in order of their priority.
PAGE 574
Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup 33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 33-02 (ACI Department Calling Group): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 33 02 33-02-01 ACI Port1 ACI_Group 1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 33-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 558 ◆ Programming ACI Portnn − + → Enter the ACI port number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 575
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup to defines the basic settings for each E&M tie line. Input Data Trunk Port Number 1-200 Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 DID/E&M Start Signaling Set the start signaling mode for DID and tie trunks.
PAGE 576
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 34-01 (E&M Tie Line Basic Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 34 01 34-01-01 Trk Port 1 Signal_Type 1:Wink back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 34-01-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 560 ◆ Programming Trk Port nnn − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 577
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service 34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service to assign a Class of Service to a tie line (there are 15 tie line Classes of Service). The Class of Service options are defined in Program 20-14. For each tie line, you make a separate entry for each Night Service mode. Input Data Trunk Port Number 1-200 Item No.
PAGE 578
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 34-02 (E&M Tie Line Class of Service): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 34 02 34-02-01 Trk Port 1 Mode1 Class_No. 1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 34-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 562 ◆ Programming Trk Port nnn − + → Enter the trunk port number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 579
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines 34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines to assign the trunk group route 1-100) chosen when a user seizes a tie line and dials 9. (Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-07.) If the UX5000 has Automatic Route Selection, dialing 9 accesses ARS.
PAGE 580
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 34-03 (Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 34 03 34-03-01 Trk Port 1 Mode1 Route_Table1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 34-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 564 ◆ Programming Trk Port nnn − + → Enter the trunk port number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 581
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class 34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class to enter a Toll Restriction Class for each tie line. There are 15 Toll Restriction Classes which are defined in Programs 21-05 and 21-06. For each tie line, you make a separate Toll Restriction Class entry for each Night Service mode.
PAGE 582
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 34-04 (E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 34 04 34-04-01 Trk Port 1 Mode1 T/R_Class_No.2 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 34-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 566 ◆ Programming Trk Port nnn − + → Enter the trunk port number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 583
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction 34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction to build a restriction matrix for outgoing trunk calls placed from an inbound trunk (e.g., dialed from a tie line). For each inbound trunk group, enable or disable access to each CO trunk group. Users are able to tandem trunk to any trunk group by default.
PAGE 584
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Tie Lines Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 34-05 (Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 34 05 34-05-01 INC Group 1 O.T.G. 001 1:No-Tande back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 34-05-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 585
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-06 : Add / Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line 34-06 : Add / Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 34-06 : Add / Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line to set digits that the UX5000 should add or delete for tie lines. ● Delete Digit Some tie line networks pass the location number and extension number to the remote side. This program allows the UX5000 to ignore such numbers for a call.
PAGE 586
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-06 : Add / Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 34-06 (Add / Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 34 06 34-06-01 INC Group 1 Delete_Digit 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 34-06-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 570 ◆ Programming INC Group nn − + → Enter the Incoming Trunk Group port number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 587
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer 34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer to define the UX5000 service tone timers. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 588
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 34-07 (E&M Tie Line Timer): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 34 07 34-07-01 1st Digit_M/O 3 Sec. back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 34-07-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 572 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 589
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines 34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines to define the toll restriction data for E&M tie lines. This data should be defined if Tie Line Toll Restriction is enabled in Program 21-05-13. Input Data Class of Service 01-15 Item No. Table No.
PAGE 590
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 34-08 (Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 34 08 34-08-01 Deny TBL1 Dial_Data 01 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 34-08-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 574 ◆ Programming Deny TBLnn − + → Enter the Deny Table number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 591
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options 34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options to define the ANI//DNIS service option setup for E&M Class of Service. Input Data Class of Service Item No. 01-15 Default Name Input Data COS 01-14 COS 15 Related Program 01 Receive Format Use this option to specify the format of the ANI/DNIS data received from the telco.
PAGE 592
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options Default Item No. 04 Name Route Table Setup of Target Dial The option sets how the UX5000 uses the route data (gathered in Item 3) to route incoming ANI/DNIS calls). Input Data Related Program COS 01-14 COS 15 0 = ABB Table (Program 13-03) 1 = DID Table (Program 22-11) 0 0 13-04-01 13-04-03 22-09-01 22-11 34-09-05 34-09-06 If option ‘2’ is selected and the call is to be routed using the DID table (1), up to 8 digits can be matched.
PAGE 593
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options Default Item No. Name Input Data COS 01-14 COS 15 Related Program 08 Routing When Destination Busy or No Answer This option lets you determine how the UX5000 will handle an ANI/DNIS call if destination is busy or does not answer.
PAGE 594
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-10 : Digit Delete for T1 ANI 34-10 : Digit Delete for T1 ANI Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 34-10 : Toll Digit Delete for T1 ANI to delete Information Digits notified from the Network for Feature Group D trunks. Input Data Incoming Trunk Group Number 001-100 Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Programs 01 Delete Digit Set the number of digits to be deleted from the head of ANI Information.
PAGE 595
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-10 : Digit Delete for T1 ANI Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 34-10 (Digit Delete for T1 ANI): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 34 10 34-10-01 INC Group 1 Delete Digit 2 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 34-10-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. INC Group n − + → Enter the Incoming Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 596
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup 34-10 : Digit Delete for T1 ANI - For Your Notes - 580 ◆ Programming UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 597
Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup 35-01 : SMDR Options Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup 35-01 : SMDR Options Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 35-01 : SMDR Options to set the SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) options for each of the 8 SMDR ports. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Input Data SMDR Port Number Item No.
PAGE 598
Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup 35-01 : SMDR Options Item No. Item 08 SMDR Format Do not change: This option is added to allow an increased account code field from 8 to 16 when used in the U.K. This allows 16 characters of the Caller ID name to be displayed. For the U.S., this option is set to "0" and should remain at this setting as 16 characters are already provided for the account code field.
PAGE 599
Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup 35-02 : SMDR Output Options 35-02 : SMDR Output Options Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 35-02 : SMDR Output Options to set the SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) output options for each of the 8 SMDR ports. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Input Data SMDR Port Number Item No.
PAGE 600
Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup 35-02 : SMDR Output Options Item No. Item Input Data Default 11 Walking Toll Restriction Table Number - Not Used - 0=Not Displayed 1=Displayed 1 12 DID Table Name Output Determine if the DID table name should be displayed. 0=Not Displayed 1=Displayed 0 13 CLI Output When DID to Trunk Determine if the CLI output should be displayed for DID. 0=Not Displayed 1=Displayed 14 Date Determine whether the date should be displayed on SMDR reports.
PAGE 601
Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup 35-02 : SMDR Output Options Item No. Item Input Data Default 20 External Information CFW Mode Determine which information is displayed in the "STATION" area for a transferred call when the extension has Call Forward set with an Abbreviated Dial number as the destination. Selecting "0" (Transfer Info) will display the extension number which called the extension with external Call Forward set.
PAGE 602
Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup 35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group 35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group to assign the SMDR port for each trunk group. For each Trunk Group, select the SMDR port to which the incoming SMDR information should be sent. Input Data Trunk Group Number 1-100 Item No. SMDR Port No.
PAGE 603
Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup 35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 35-03 (SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 35 03 35-03-01 TRK Group 1 SMDR Port 1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 35-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. TRK Group nnn − + → Enter the trunk group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 604
Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup 35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups 35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups Level: Feature Availability IN • Available - 64 Department Groups. Description Use Program 35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups to assign the SMDR port for each Department Group. For each Department Group, select the SMDR port to which the outgoing SMDR information should be sent. Input Data Department Group Number 01-64 Item No. SMDR Port No.
PAGE 605
Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup 35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 35-04 (SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 35 04 35-04-01 Extn Group1 SMDR Port 1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 35-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Extn Groupnn − + → Enter the Extension (Department) Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 606
Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup 35-05 : Account Code Setup 35-05 : Account Code Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 35-01 : Account Code Setup to set various Account Code options for an extension’s Class of Service. Assign a Class of Service to extensions in Program 20-06. Input Data Class of Service Number Item No. Item 01-15 Input Data Default 01 Account Code Mode Use this option to select the Account Code Mode (0-3).
PAGE 607
Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup 35-05 : Account Code Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 35-05 (Account Code Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 35 05 35-05-01 FCTN Cls1 Account_Code 0:None back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 35-05-nn FCTN Clsnn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. − + → Enter the Class of Service number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 608
Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup 35-06 : Verified Account Code Table 35-06 : Verified Account Code Table Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 35-06 : Verified Account Code Table to enter Account Codes into the Verified Account Code list. You can enter up to 2000 codes from 3-16 digits long, using the characters 0-9 or #. Use the FLASH key to enter a wild card. For example, the entry FLASH234 means the user can enter 0234-9234.
PAGE 609
Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup 35-06 : Verified Account Code Table Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 35-06 (Verified Account Code Table): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 35 06 35-06-01 Table1 Verified_A-Code back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 35-06-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Tablennnn − + → Enter the Verified Account Code Table number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 610
Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup 35-06 : Verified Account Code Table - For Your Notes - 594 ◆ Programming UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 611
Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup 40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup 40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup to define the basic operation of Voice Mail (DSPDB). The DSPDB Voice Mail is not used in U.S.
PAGE 612
Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup 40-02 : Mailbox Setup 40-02 : Mailbox Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 40-02 : Mailbox Setup to define the mailbox of the Voice Mail (DSPDB). The DSPDB Voice Mail is not used in U.S.
PAGE 613
Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup 40-03 : Message Recording Setup 40-03 : Message Recording Setup Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 40-03 : Message Recording Setup to define the auto-answering operation of the Voice Mail (DSPDB). The DSPDB Voice Mail is not used in U.S.
PAGE 614
Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup 40-04 : Live Recording Setup 40-04 : Live Recording Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 40-04 : Live Recording Setup to define the conversation recording operation of the Voice Mail (DSPDB). The DSPDB Voice Mail is not used in U.S.
PAGE 615
Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup 40-05 : Call Information Setup 40-05 : Call Information Setup Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 40-05 : Call Information Setup to define the incoming notice of the Voice Mail (DSPDB). The DSPDB Voice Mail is not used in U.S.
PAGE 616
Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup 40-06 : Voice Mail Automated Attendant Data Setup 40-06 : Voice Mail Automated Attendant Data Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 40-06 : Voice Mail Automated Attendant Data Setup to define the outside lines to use the automated attendant recording operation of the Voice Mail (DSPDB). The DSPDB Voice Mail is not used in U.S.
PAGE 617
Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup 40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS 40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS to specify the language to be used for the VRS prompts. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 618
Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup 40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 40-07 (Voice Prompt Language Assignment for System): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 40 07 40-07-01 Lang 1 :US English |1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 40-07-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 602 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 619
Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup 40-08 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Mailboxes 40-08 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Mailboxes Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 40-08 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Mailboxes to select the language to be used for the mailboxes. The DSPDB Voice Mail is not used in U.S.
PAGE 620
Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup 40-09 : Voice Mail Multiple Address Group Setup 40-09 : Voice Mail Multiple Address Group Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 40-09 : Voice Mail Multiple Address Group Setup to define the broadcast group of a Voice Mail (DSPDB) mailbox. The DSPDB Voice Mail is not used in U.S.
PAGE 621
Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup 40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option 40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description In Program 40-10 : Voice Announcement Serv ice Option define the UX5000 options for the Voice Announcement feature with the VRS. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 622
Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup 40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option 08 Busy Call Attendant Message Define the Call Attendant message number to be heard when a called extension is busy. This is used when setting the option system-wide. (Program 15-01-08 is not used.) 0=no message 001-100= message number 0 15-01-08 09 No Answer Call Attendant Message Define the Call Attendant message number to be heard when a called extension does not answer. This is used when setting the option system-wide.
PAGE 623
Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup 40-11 : Pre-Amble Message Assignment 40-11 : Pre-Amble Message Assignment Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description In Program 40-11 : Pre-Amble Message Assignment to assign the VAU message number to be used as the Pre-amble Message for each trunk. When the extension user answers the incoming call, the assigned VAU message will be sent to the outside caller. Input Data Trunk Port Number 1-200 Day/Night Mode 1-8 Item No.
PAGE 624
Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup 40-11 : Pre-Amble Message Assignment Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 40-11 (Pre-Amble Message Assignment): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 40 11 40-11-01 Trunk1 Mode1 Preamble MSG 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 40-11-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 608 ◆ Programming Trunknnn − + → Enter the trunk number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 625
Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup 40-12 : One Digit Access Setup 40-12 : One Digit Access Setup Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 40-12 : One Digit Access Setup to define the service code a user presses when accessing the Voice Mail (DSPDBU). The DSPDB Voice Mail is not used in U.S.
PAGE 626
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-01 : System Options for ACD Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-01 : System Options for ACD Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description In Program 41-01 : System Options for ACD define the UX5000 options for the ACD feature. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 System Supervisor Extension Select the extension which will be used as the ACD system supervisor.
PAGE 627
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-01 : System Options for ACD Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 41-01 (System Options for ACD): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 41 01 41-01-01 Supervisor Ext back ↑ ↓ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 41-01-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. select → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 628
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments 41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description In Program 41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments, for each ACD extension number, assign an ACD Group (1-64). An ACD Group number is assigned to each Work Period number (1-8).
PAGE 629
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 41-02 (ACD Group and Agent Assignments): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 41 02 41-02-01 TEL301 Mode1 Group 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 41-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 7. TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 630
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group 41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description In Program 41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignments for ACD Group, for each incoming trunk group set up in Program 22-05, designate into which ACD Group (1-64) the trunks should ring for each of the eight Work Periods. Also use this program to assign an Incoming Trunk Ring Group as priority or normal.
PAGE 631
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 41-03 (Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 41 03 41-03-01 INC Group1 Mode1 Group 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 41-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. INC Groupnnn − + → Enter the Incoming Ring Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 632
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-04 : ACD Group Supervisor 41-04 : ACD Group Supervisor Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description For each ACD Group (1-64), use Program 41-04 : ACD Group Supervisor to assign the group’s supervisor extension and operating mode. A supervisor's extension receives ACD Group calls just like all other agents. Operating modes are: ● 0 = Supervisor’s extension does not receive ACD Group calls. ● 1 = Supervisor’s extension receives ACD Group overflow calls only.
PAGE 633
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-04 : ACD Group Supervisor Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 41-04 (ACD Group Supervisor): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 41 04 41-04-01 ACD Group1 GP_Supervisor back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 41-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. ACD Groupnn − + → Enter the ACD Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 634
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules 41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules to set up the Work Schedules for ACD Agents and Groups. For each ACD Work Schedule (1-4), designate the start and stop times for each of the eight Work Periods. Once you set up the schedules in this program, assign them to days of the week in Program 41-07.
PAGE 635
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 41-05 (ACD Agent Work Schedules): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 41 05 41-05-01 Time Pttn 1 Mode1 Start_Time=00:00 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 41-05-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Time Pttn n − + → Enter the Time Pattern number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 636
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules 41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules to set up the Work Schedules for trunks. For each Work Schedule (1-4), designate the start and stop times for each of the eight Work Periods. Once you set up the schedules, assign them to days of the week in Program 41-07. (This is the same program used by the ACD Agent Work Schedules.
PAGE 637
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 41-06 (Trunk Work Schedules): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 41 06 41-06-01 Time Pttn 1 Mode1 Start_Time=00:00 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 41-06-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Time Pttn n − + → Enter the Time Pattern number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 638
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup 41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup to assign the four Work Schedules (1-4) to days of the week. The assignments you make in this program apply to both the ACD Agent Work Schedules (Program 41-05) and the Trunk Work Schedules (Program 41-06). Input Data Item No.
PAGE 639
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 41-07 (ACD Weekly Schedule Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 41 07 41-07-01 Sunday back ↑ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 41-07-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. =Pattn0 ↓ select → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 640
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-08 : ACD Overflow Options 41-08 : ACD Overflow Options Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description For each ACD Group (1-64), use Program 41-08 : ACD Overflow Options to assign the overflow mode (0-9), destination and announcement message types. Delay announcement functions are not available for ACD pilot number call. Each ACD Group can have unique overflow options. The table below outlines the entry options. Input Data ACD Group No Item No.
PAGE 641
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-08 : ACD Overflow Options 04 ACD Overflow Transfer Time Overflow out of the ACD queue (mode 4 only) occurs after this timer expires. The UX5000 starts this timer as soon as a call goes into queue. Disable this timer (0) if you want queued callers to stay in queue until they are answered or they hang up. If you want queued callers to eventually overflow, consider setting this value at 180 seconds.
PAGE 642
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-08 : ACD Overflow Options Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 41-08 (ACD Overflow Options): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 41 08 41-08-01 ACD Group1 O-Flow_Mode 0:None |1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 41-08-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 626 ◆ Programming ACD Groupnn − + → Enter the ACD Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 643
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting 41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting to define the ACD group to which a call will be transferred when overflow occurs. Input Data ACD Group No 01-64 Item No.
PAGE 644
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 41-09 (ACD Overflow Table Setting): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 41 09 41-09-01 ACD Group1 Order1 ACD_Group 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 41-09-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 628 ◆ Programming ACD Groupnn − + → Enter the ACD Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 645
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-10 : PGDAD Delay Announcement 41-10 : PGDAD Delay Announcement Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 41-10 : PGDAD Delay Announcement to define the PGDAD port number to be used for the delay announcement. This program is activated when the delay announcement source and options are assigned as PGDAD in Program 41-08. Input Data ACD Group No Item No.
PAGE 646
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-10 : PGDAD Delay Announcement Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 41-10 (PGDAD Delay Announcement): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 41 10 41-10-01 ACD Group1 No.1 ACI_Port 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 41-10-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 630 ◆ Programming ACD Groupnn − + → Enter the ACD Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 647
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement 41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement to assign the VRS message number to be used as the message source for the 1st and 2nd Delay Announcement Messages. Turn to Program 41-08 for more on setting up the ACD overflow options. This program is activated when the delay announcement source and options are assigned as VRS in Program 41-08.
PAGE 648
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 41-11 (VRS Delay Announcement): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 41 11 41-11-01 ACD Group1 Delay_Msg_Strt0 Sec. back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 41-11-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 632 ◆ Programming ACD Groupnn − + → Enter the ACD Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 649
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-12 : Night Announcement Setup 41-12 : Night Announcement Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 41-12 : Night Announcement Setup to define the night announce voice resource and sending time for each ACD group. Night announcement availability depends on the setting in Program 41-03-02. The night announcement function is not available for ACD pilot number calls. Input Data ACD Group Number Item No.
PAGE 650
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-12 : Night Announcement Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 41-12 (Night Announcement Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 41 12 41-12-01 ACD Group1 NT Source 0:ACI back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 41-12-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 634 ◆ Programming ACD Groupnn − + → Enter the ACD Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 651
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement 41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 41-13 : VRS Night Announcement to define the VRS message number to be used as the night announcement. This program is activated when the night announcement source is assigned as VRS in Program 41-12. Input Data ACD Group No Item No.
PAGE 652
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 41-13 (VRS Night Announcement): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 41 13 41-13-01 ACD Group1 VRS Msg No 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 41-13-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 636 ◆ Programming ACD Groupnn − + → Enter the ACD Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 653
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-14 : ACD Options 41-14 : ACD Options Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 41-14 : ACD Options to set various options for ACD Groups. When you set an option for an ACD Group, the setting is in force (if applicable) for all agents within the group. The chart below shows each of the ACD options, the entries available, and the default entry. Input Data ACD Group No 01-64 Item No.
PAGE 654
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-14 : ACD Options 09 Automatic Wrap Up End Time 0-64800 (Seconds) 0 10 ACD No Answer Skip Time Set how long a call into the ACD Group will ring an idle extension before routing to the next agent. This timer must be greater than Program 20-04-03 : Delay Ring Timer for the ACD Call Coverage Key with delayed ringing to work.
PAGE 655
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-14 : ACD Options 13 (cont.) 14 • Destination Number DTMF Detector Assignment For each ACD Group, determine whether the DTMF should be detected during the Delay Announcement or after the Delay Announcement has finished. If 1 selected as type: extension number or voice mail pilot number (8 digits max.), (entering the voice mail pilot number allows for integration into the Queue’s pilot number voice mailbox).
PAGE 656
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-14 : ACD Options Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 41-14 (ACD Options): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 41 14 41-14-01 ACD Group1 EMG Call Mode 0:On back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 41-14-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 640 ◆ Programming ACD Groupnn − + → Enter the ACD Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 657
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-15 : ACD Queue Alarm Information 41-15 : ACD Queue Alarm Information Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 41-15 : ACD Queue Alarm Information to assign the options for “Audible Indication” for Log Out / Off Duty mode for each ACD group. These program settings will provide an alarm to the agents, but no Queue Status Display is indicated. Do not use these programs if the alarm options are defined in Program 41-20-01 through 41-20-05.
PAGE 658
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-15 : ACD Queue Alarm Information Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 41-15 (ACD Queue Alarm Information): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 41 15 41-15-01 ACD Group1 ACD Alarm 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 41-15-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 642 ◆ Programming ACD Groupnn − + → Enter the ACD Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 659
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow 41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow to define the value of the ACD threshold call overflow and the mode for each ACD group. Input Data ACD Group No 01-64 Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Number of Calls in Queue Define the maximum number of calls allowed in the ACD queue before overflow occurs.
PAGE 660
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 41-16 (ACD Threshold Overflow): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 41 16 41-16-01 ACD Group1 Queue Limit 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 41-16-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 644 ◆ Programming ACD Groupnn − + → Enter the ACD Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 661
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-17 : ACD Login Mode Setup 41-17 : ACD Login Mode Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 41-17 : ACD Login Mode Setup to define the ACD login mode for each extension. If the AIC Login Mode is enabled, set the AIC Login and AIC Logout service codes for the AIC members in Program 11-13-08 and 11-13-09. Input Data Extension Number Up to 8 digits Item No.
PAGE 662
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-17 : ACD Login Mode Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 41-17 (ACD Login Mode Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 41 17 41-17-01 TEL301 Login Mode 0:Normal back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 41-17-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 646 ◆ Programming TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 663
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-18 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup 41-18 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup Level: SA Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 41-18 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup to define the ACD Agent Identity Code Table. Input Data AIC Table No Item No.
PAGE 664
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-18 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup Feature Cross Reference ● Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 41-18 (ACD Agent Identity Code Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 41 18 41-18-01 AIC TBL 1 AIC Code back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 41-18-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 665
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-19 : Voice Mail Delay Announcement 41-19 : Voice Mail Delay Announcement Level: SA Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 41-19 : Voice Mail Delay Announcement to assign voice mail ACD Announcement Mailboxes as the message source for the 1st and 2nd Announcement Messages. This option is only applicable to ACD Overflow Modes 1, 4, 5 and 9 with announcement type 2 [Program 41-08-03]).
PAGE 666
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-19 : Voice Mail Delay Announcement Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● ● Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Voice Response Service (VRS) Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 41-19 (Voice Mail Delay Announcement): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 41 19 41-19-01 ACD Group1 Delay_Msg_Strt0 Sec. back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 41-19-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 667
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-20 : ACD Queue Display Settings 41-20 : ACD Queue Display Settings Level: SA Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 41-20 : ACD Queue Display Settings to assign the options for the ACD Queue Status Display feature. This program allows the Queue Status Display, as well as an alarm to sound, when the parameters in this program are met. Program 41-15 can also provide a queue alarm to the agents. The options in Program 41-20 should not be used if 41-15 is set.
PAGE 668
Program 41 : ACD Setup 41-20 : ACD Queue Display Settings 04 ACD Call Waiting Alarm Enable or disable the queue alarm. 05 ACD Call Waiting Alarm Send Time Set how long the Call Waiting Alarm should sound. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 0-64800 seconds 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 41-20 (ACD Queue Display Settings): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 41 20 41-20-01 ACD Group1 No of Queue (Disp.
PAGE 669
Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel to assign the UX5000 options for Hotel/ Motel Service. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Answering Message Mode for Wake Up Call (Hotel Mode) Use this option to determine what a guest hears when they answer a Wake Up call.
PAGE 670
Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 42-01 (System Options for Hotel/Motel): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 42 01 42-01-01 Answer Message0:HoldTone back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 42-01-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 654 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 671
Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Terminal Setup 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Terminal Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Terminal Setup to define the basic operation of the Hotel/ Motel extensions. Input Data Extension Number Up to 8 digits Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Hotel Mode If you want an extension to operate in the Hotel/Motel mode, 1. If you want the terminal to operate in the business mode, enter 0.
PAGE 672
Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Terminal Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 42-02 (Hotel/Motel Terminal Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 42 02 42-02-01 TEL301 Hotel Mode 0:Normal back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 42-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 656 ◆ Programming TELnnn − + → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 673
Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) 42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel) to set the Hotel/Motel Class of Service (COS) options. Assign Class of Service to extensions in Program 20-06-01. There are 15 Classes of Service. Refer to the following chart for a description of each COS option, its range and default setting.
PAGE 674
Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) Default Item No. Item Input Data Class 01 Class 02-15 09 DND Setting for Own Extension Enable or disable an extension’s ability to set Hotel DND for itself. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 0 10 Wake Up Call Setting for Own Extension Enable or disable an extension’s ability to set a Wake Up Call for itself.
PAGE 675
Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 42-03 (Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel)): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 42 03 42-03-01 FCTN Cls1 Check-in 1:On back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 42-03-nn FCTN Clsnn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. − + → Enter the Class of Service number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 676
Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes 42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes to set up the Hotel Mode one-digit service code. For each Department Group (1-64) you enter the destination for each single digit code (1-9, 0, *, #). The destination can be any code up to four digits long, such as an extension number or access code.
PAGE 677
Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 42-04 (Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 42 04 42-04-01 TEL Group1 1digit Accs 1= back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 42-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. TEL Groupnn − + → Enter the Department/Terminal Group number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 678
Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer 42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer to set the output port for the Hotel Data (Check-Out sheet, Room Status etc...) and the output options for the Hotel/Motel feature. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Output Port Type If a Hotel Room Status Printer is to be used, enter “3” to select the LAN output.
PAGE 679
Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 42-05 (Hotel Room Status Printer): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 42 05 42-05-01 Output Port Type 0:No back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 42-05-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 680
Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion 42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion to set the PMS restriction level. Input Data Restriction Level Item No.
PAGE 681
Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 42-07 (PMS Restriction Level Conversion): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 42 07 42-07-01 back 3. ↑ select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 42-07-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. ↓ → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 682
Program 42 : Hotel Setup 42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion - For Your Notes - 666 ◆ Programming UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 683
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route to define the UX5000 options for the ARS/F-Route feature. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 684
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access 44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the Pre-Transaction Table for selecting ARS/F-Route. Input Data Dial Analysis Table Number Item No. Item 1-120 Input Data Default 01 Dial Set the number of digits to be analyzed by the UX5000 for ARS routing.
PAGE 685
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access Item No. 03 04 Item Input Data Default 1: Delete Digit = 0-255 (255 : delete all digits) 2: 0-500 (0=No setting) 3: Dial Extension Analyze Table Number = 0-4 (0=No setting) 0 Additional Data For the Service Type selected in 44-02-02, enter the additional data required. • 1: Delete Digit = 0-255 (255=delete all digits) • 2: [Program 44-01 : 0] ARS/F-Route Table Number = 0-500 (0=No setting) Refer to Program 44-05.
PAGE 686
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table 44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description When Program 44-02-02 is set to type “3”, use Program 44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table to set the dial extension analysis table. These tables are used when the analyzed digits must be more than 8 digits.
PAGE 687
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table Dial Analysis Table Number : 252 Item No. 04 Item Next Table Area Number Input Data Default 0-4 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Automatic Route Selection (ARS)/F-Route Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 44-03 (Dial Analysis Extension Table): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 44 03 44-03-01 Exp-Table 1 001:Dial = back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
PAGE 688
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule to assign each ARS/F-Route Selection number to an ARS/F-Route table number for each ARS/F-Route time mode. There are 8 time modes for ARS/F-Route Access. Input Data ARS/F-Route Selection Number 1-500 Item No.
PAGE 689
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table to set the ARS/F-Route table. There are 4 kinds of order. If the higher priority trunk groups are busy, the next order group will be used. If a lower priority route is selected, the caller may be notified with a beep tone. Input Data ARS/F-Route Table Number 1-500 Priority Number 1-4 Item No.
PAGE 690
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table 08 Dial Treatment Select the Dial Treatment to be used for the table. If a Dial Treatment is selected, Programs 44-05-02 and 44-05-03 are ignored and the Dial Treatment defined in Program 26-03-01 is used instead. 0-15 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Automatic Route Selection (ARS)/F-Route Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 44-05 (ARS/F-Route Table): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode.
PAGE 691
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-06 : Additional Dial Table 44-06 : Additional Dial Table Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 44-06 : Additional Dial Table to set the additional dial table to add prior to the dialed ARS/F-Route number. The Additional Dial Table used is determined in Program 44-05-03. Input Data Additional Dial Table Number 1-1000 Item No.
PAGE 692
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access 44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the gain/PAD table. If an extension dials ARS/F-Route number; ● The Extension Dial Gain Table is activated, which is assigned in Program 44-05. ● The Extension Dial Gain Table follows “Outgoing transmit” and “Outgoing receive” settings.
PAGE 693
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 44-07 (Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 44 07 44-07-01 Gain TBL 1 INC Transmit 32 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 44-07-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Gain TBL nnn − + → Enter the Gain Table number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 694
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route 44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define the daily pattern of the ARS/ F-Route feature. ARS/F-Route has 10 time patterns. These patterns are used in Program 44-09 and 44-10. The daily pattern consists of 20 time settings. Input Data Schedule Pattern Number 01-10 Item No.
PAGE 695
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 44-08 (Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 44 08 44-08-01 Time Pttn 1 T-Zone01:Start =00:00 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 44-08-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Time Pttn nn − + → Enter the Time Pattern number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 696
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route 44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define a weekly schedule for using ARS/F-Route. The pattern number is defined in Program 44-08-01. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 697
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 44-09 (Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 44 09 44-09-01 Sunday Pattern=1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 44-09-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 698
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup 44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route 44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define a yearly schedule for ARS/ F-Route. This schedule is used for setting special days such as national holidays. The pattern number is defined in Program 44-08-01. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 699
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration 45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration 45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options to customize certain voice mail integration options. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 700
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration 45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options 05 Message Wait Enable/disable the UX5000’s ability to process the Voice Mail’s Message Wait (#) commands. You should normally enable this option. If enabled, be sure that the programmed Message Notification strings don’t contain the code #9 for trunk access. When using the voice mail’s Dial Action Table external transfers (ex: to an Abbreviated Dial number), this setting must be set to “0” (off).
PAGE 701
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration 45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options Feature Cross Reference ● Voice Mail Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 45-01 (Voice Mail Integration Options): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 45 01 45-01-01 STG No. of VM back ↑ 3. 0 select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 45-01-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. ↓ → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 702
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration 45-02 : NSL Option Setup 45-02 : NSL Option Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 45-02 : NSL Option Setup to customize the NSL options for Voice Mail integration. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Send DTMF Tone or 6KD Message With 6KD enabled, the UX5000 uses NSL messages to communicate with an IntraMail voice mail port (rather than DTMF tones). This is required for IntraMail operation.
PAGE 703
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration 45-02 : NSL Option Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 45-02 (NSL Option Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 45 02 45-02-01 DTMF/6KD Msg. 0:DTMF back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 45-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 704
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration 45-03 : NSL Timer Setup 45-03 : NSL Timer Setup Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 45-03 : NSL Timer Setup to customize the NSL timers for Voice Mail integration. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 705
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration 45-03 : NSL Timer Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 45-03 (NSL Timer Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 45 03 45-03-01 Retry Timer back ↑ 3. 4 select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 45-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. ↓ → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 706
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration 45-03 : NSL Timer Setup - For Your Notes - 690 ◆ Programming UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 707
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-01 : IntraMail System Options Program 47 : IntraMail 47-01 : IntraMail System Options Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 47-01 : IntraMail System Options to set up the IntraMail system-wide options. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default - - 01 - Not Used (Use Program 47-01-17 to enable IntraMail) 02 IntraMail Master Name (MasterName) Use this option to modify the name for all IntraMail ports.
PAGE 708
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-01 : IntraMail System Options 04 Non-Subscriber Message Length (Mbox Msg Length) Use this option to set the maximum length of outgoing recorded messages for: • Announcement Mailbox Messages • Call Routing Mailbox Instruction Menus • Directory Dialing Messages • Greetings for Subscriber Mailboxes • Message On Hold 05 Message Backup/Go Ahead Time (Msg Bkup/Adv Time) Use this option to set the backup/go ahead interval.
PAGE 709
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-01 : IntraMail System Options 08 Delay in Dialing Digital Pager Callback Number (Pager Dial Delay) Use this option to set the delay (0-99 seconds) that occurs just before IntraMail dials the Digital Pager Callback Number portion of the Message Notification callout number for a digital pager. Set this delay so the pager service has enough time to connect to the digital pager before sending the callback number.
PAGE 710
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-01 : IntraMail System Options 12 Wait Between RNA Non-Pager Callout Attempts (Notify RNA Intvl) Use this option to set how long IntraMail will wait (1-255 minutes), after it dials an unanswered non-pager callout destination, before retrying the callout number. 1-255 minutes 30 minutes 1-99 rings 5 rings There are three types of unanswered non-pager callouts: • If the callout rings the destination longer than the 47-01-13: Wait for Answer Non-Pager Callout Attempts option.
PAGE 711
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-01 : IntraMail System Options 17 Start of IntraMail Port Use this option to set the IntraMail starting port number. • This must be an unassigned port. • To avoid conflicts, you should use the last 16 ports for IntraMail. The assignment in this option is the first (lowest numbered) of those last 16 ports. - For example, in a 64-port UX5000 consider starting at port 49. • Note that UX5000 licensing determines the number of available ports.
PAGE 712
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-02: IntraMail Station Mailbox Options 47-02: IntraMail Station Mailbox Options Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use 47-02: IntraMail Station Mailbox Options to set up a station’s (extension’s) mailbox. Station mailboxes are automatically assigned as Subscriber Mailboxes. NormaStation Mailboxes can be either Personal or Group. Station Mailboxes are one of three mailbox categories: Station, Routing, and Master.
PAGE 713
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-02: IntraMail Station Mailbox Options 03 Number of Messages (Number of Messages) Use this option to set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller tries to leave a message once this limit is reached, they hear, “That mailbox is full.” IntraMail then hangs up. 04 Message Playback (Message Playback) Use this option to set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback order.
PAGE 714
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-02: IntraMail Station Mailbox Options 08 Message Waiting Lamp (Update MW Lamp) Use this option to enable or disable Message Waiting lamping at the extension associated with the Subscriber mailbox. For Subscriber Mailboxes, you should leave this option enabled. For Guest Mailboxes, you should leave this option disabled.
PAGE 715
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-02: IntraMail Station Mailbox Options 14 Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CR Mbox) Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox. This provides callers with additional dialing options while listening to a Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting. The digits the caller can dial depends on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox options.
PAGE 716
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-02: IntraMail Station Mailbox Options 18 Paging Option [Paging Option] When Automated Attendant Direct to Voice Mail is enabled, use this option to set how Park and Page will intercept calls. It can intercept calls immediately and do a Park and Page (1), or handle Park and Page like any other transferred outside call (0). 0=RNA 1=Immediate 1 19 Terminal User Interface (User Interface) Use this option to set the IntraMail voice prompt interface type.
PAGE 717
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-02: IntraMail Station Mailbox Options Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 47-02 (IntraMail Station Mailbox Options): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 47 02 47-02-01 Mailbox1 Mailbox Active 1:Yes back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 47-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Mailboxnn − + → Enter the mailbox number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 718
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-03: IntraMail Group Mailbox Options 47-03: IntraMail Group Mailbox Options Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use 47-03: Group Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Group Mailboxes (01-32). A Group Mailbox is used for Department Group overflow and can be a Subscriber or Call Routing Mailbox. Input Data Group Mailbox Number Item No.
PAGE 719
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-03: IntraMail Group Mailbox Options Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 47-03 (IntraMail Group Mailbox Options): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 47 03 47-03-01 Mailbox1 Mailbox Active 0:No back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 47-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Mailboxnn − + → Enter the mailbox number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 720
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-06: Group Subscriber Mailbox Options 47-06: Group Subscriber Mailbox Options Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use 47-06: Group Subscriber Mailbox Options to set up a Group Mailbox assigned as a Subscriber Mailbox in 47-03-03: Group Mailbox Type. Input Data Group Mailbox Number 01-32 Item No.
PAGE 721
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-06: Group Subscriber Mailbox Options 05 Recording Conversation Beep (Rec Conv Beep) Use this option to enable or disable the Conversation Record beep. If enabled, all parties on a call will hear the voice prompt Recording followed by a single beep when the extension user initiates Conversation Record. If disabled, the voice prompt and beep will not occur.
PAGE 722
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-06: Group Subscriber Mailbox Options 10 System Administrator (System Admin) Use this option to designate the Subscriber Mailbox as a System Administrator. This allows the subscriber to use the SA options after logging onto their mailbox. 1 (Yes - enabled) 0 (No - disabled) 0 (No disabled) 11 Dialing Option (Dialing Option) Dialing Option provides additional dialing options for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls (see Next Call Routing Mailbox below).
PAGE 723
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-06: Group Subscriber Mailbox Options 15 Enable Paging [Enable Paging] Use this option to enable or disable the Park and Page option for the mailbox. If enabled, when an outside call can’t go through Park and Page automatically parks the call and pages the extension user. This option is the same as the Mailbox Options: Call Options: Paging user setting. The setting you make in this option overrides the Mailbox Options setting and visa-versa.
PAGE 724
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-06: Group Subscriber Mailbox Options Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 47-06 (Master Subscriber Mailbox Options): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 47 06 47-06-01 Mailbox1 Number of Messages 20 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 47-06-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 708 ◆ Programming Mailboxnn − + → Enter the mailbox number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 725
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-07: IntraMail Routing Mailbox Options 47-07: IntraMail Routing Mailbox Options Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use 47-07: IntraMail Routing Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Routing. Routing Mailboxes can be either Announcement or Call Routing Mailboxes. Input Data Routing Mailbox Number Item No. Item 01 - Not Used - 02 Routing Mailbox Type (Mailbox Type) Use this option to set the Routing Mailbox type: Call Routing (1) or Announcement (2).
PAGE 726
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-07: IntraMail Routing Mailbox Options 04 IntraMail Dialing Interface (User Interface) Use this option to set the IntraMail voice prompt interface type. The options are numeric (0) or mnemonic (1). If set to numeric, voice mail options are announced as digits: “To record and send a message, dial seven seven.” If set to mnemonic, voice mail options are announced descriptively: “To record and send a message, dial R S,” where R S is a mnemonic representation of Record and Send.
PAGE 727
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-08: Call Routing Mailbox Options 47-08: Call Routing Mailbox Options Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use 47-08: Call Routing Mailbox Options to set the options for mailboxes assigned as Call Routing Mailboxes in 47-07-02: Routing Mailbox Type. Input Data Routing Mailbox Number 01-32 Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Dial Action Table (Dial Action Table) Use this option to assign the Dial Action Table to the Call Routing Mailbox.
PAGE 728
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-08: Call Routing Mailbox Options 05 Fax Extension (Fax Extension) Use this option to specify the extension number of the fax machine associated with the Call Routing Mailbox. When the Call Routing Mailbox answers a call and detects fax (CNG) tone, it automatically transfers the call to this extension.
PAGE 729
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-09: Announcement Mailbox Options 47-09: Announcement Mailbox Options Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use 47-09: Announcement Mailbox Options to set the options for mailboxes assigned as Announcement Mailboxes in 47-07-02: Routing Mailbox Type. Input Data Routing Mailbox Number 01-32 Item No.
PAGE 730
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-09: Announcement Mailbox Options Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Voice Mail Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 47-09 (Announcement Mailbox Options): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 47 09 47-09-01 Mailbox1 Next CR Mbox 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 47-09-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 714 ◆ Programming Mailboxnn − + → Enter the mailbox number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 731
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-10: IntraMail Trunk Options 47-10: IntraMail Trunk Options Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use 47-10: IntraMail Trunk Options to assign IntraMail options for each trunk. Input Data Trunk Port Number 001-200 Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Answer Table Assignment (Answer Table) Use this option to assign an IntraMail Answer Table to each Direct Inward Line (DIL) the Automated Attendant should answer.
PAGE 732
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-10: IntraMail Trunk Options 04 IntraMail Dialing Interface (User Interface) For the selected trunk, use this option to set the IntraMail voice prompt interface type. The options are numeric (0) or mnemonic (1). If set to numeric, voice mail options are announced as digits: “To record and send a message, dial seven seven.
PAGE 733
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-11: IntraMail Answer Table Options 47-11: IntraMail Answer Table Options Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use 47-11: IntraMail Answer Table Options to set options for the Answer Tables. IntraMail provides 8 Answer Tables (1-8). To set up the schedules for each Answer Table, go to 47-12: IntraMail Answer Table Schedule. Input Data Answer Table Number 1-8 Item No.
PAGE 734
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-11: IntraMail Answer Table Options 02 Override Mailbox Category (Override MB Ctg) Use this option to specify the category of the mailbox to which Automated Attendant calls should route when you enable Answer Schedule Override. IntraMail mailbox categories are Subscriber Mailbox (refer to Program 47-02), Group Mailbox (refer to Program 47-03), and Routing Mailbox (refer to Program 47-07).
PAGE 735
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-11: IntraMail Answer Table Options 03 Default Mailbox Category (Default MB Ctg) Use this option to specify the category of mailbox used as the Default Mailbox. IntraMail mailbox categories are Subscriber Mailbox (refer to Program 47-02), Group Mailbox (refer to Program 47-03), and Routing Mailbox (refer to Program 47-07). IntraMail uses the Default Mailbox whenever an Answer Schedule is not in effect.
PAGE 736
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-11: IntraMail Answer Table Options Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 47-11 (IntraMail Answer Table Options): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 47 11 47-11-01 Table1 Schedule Override 0:No back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 47-11-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 720 ◆ Programming Tablenn − + → Enter the table number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 737
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-12: IntraMail Answer Schedules 47-12: IntraMail Answer Schedules Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use 47-12: IntraMail Answer Schedules to set up the IntraMail Automated Attendant Answer Schedules. There are eight Answer Tables, with up to 10 Answer Schedules in each Answer Table. Input Data Answer Table Number 1-8 Schedule Entry Number 01-10 Item No.
PAGE 738
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-12: IntraMail Answer Schedules 02 Answering Mailbox Category (Entryxx MB Ctg) Use this option to specify the category of mailbox to which Automated Attendant calls should route when the schedule is in effect. IntraMail mailbox categories are Station Mailbox (refer to Program 47-02), Group Mailbox (refer to Program 47-03), and Routing Mailbox (refer to Program 47-07).
PAGE 739
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-12: IntraMail Answer Schedules 05 End Day (Entryxx End Day) For Range of Days (Type 2) Answer Schedules, use this option to select the day of the week the Answer Schedule should end. 1 (Sunday) 2 (Monday) 3 (Tuesday) 4 (Wednesday) 5 (Thursday) 6 (Friday) 7 (Saturday) Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 = 6 (Friday) All other Answer Schedules = 1 (Sunday) 06 Date (Entryxx Date) For Date (Type 3) Answer Schedules, use this option to select the date the Answer Schedule should be active.
PAGE 740
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-12: IntraMail Answer Schedules Type 1 (Day of Week) Example Answer Table 1 Answer Schedule 1 Answer Schedule 1 is a Day of Week schedule that runs Sunday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.
PAGE 741
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-12: IntraMail Answer Schedules Type 2 (Range of Days) Answer Schedule Options Type 2 (Range of Days) Example In this example, Answer Table 1 routes calls as follows: Schedule 1 uses Routing Mailbox 1 and runs Sunday through Wednesday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM. Schedule 2 uses Routing Mailbox 2 and runs Thursday and Friday from 11:00AM to 1:00PM.
PAGE 742
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-12: IntraMail Answer Schedules Type 3 (Date) Answer Schedule Options Type 3 (Date) Example In this example, Answer Table 1 routes calls as follows: Schedule 1 uses Routing Mailbox 1 and runs every day from 8:30AM to 5:00PM. Schedule 2 uses Routing Mailbox 9 and runs only on Christmas day from 8:30AM to 5:00PM. At all other times, routing is handled by the Default Mailbox specified in 47-11-03: Default Mailbox Category and 47-11-03: Default Mailbox Number.
PAGE 743
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-12: IntraMail Answer Schedules Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 47-12 (IntraMail Answer Schedules): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 47 12 47-12-01 Table1 Entry01 Schedule Type 2 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 47-12-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Tablenn − + → Enter the table number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 744
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-13: IntraMail Dial Action Tables 47-13: IntraMail Dial Action Tables Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use 47-13: IntraMail Dial Action Tables to set up the IntraMail Dial Action Tables. The Dial Action Table defines the options than an Automated Attendant caller can dial. A Dial Action Table is associated with a Call Routing Mailbox, which is in turn associated with an Answer Table.
PAGE 745
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-13: IntraMail Dial Action Tables Dial Action Table Actions ● ● ● TRF Action - Screened Transfer (1) (TRF) Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to place a Screened Transfer to an extension. After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, IntraMail calls (screens) the destination to see if the transfer can go through. If the destination is available, the Automated Attendant rings it. If the destination answers, the call goes through.
PAGE 746
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-13: IntraMail Dial Action Tables ● ● ● 730 ◆ Programming REC2 Action - Quick Message Without Greeting (4) (REC2) Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick Message at an extension. With this action, the caller will not hear the extension’s greeting prior to leaving the message. Instead, the caller hears the voice prompt “Recording” followed by a beep.
PAGE 747
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-13: IntraMail Dial Action Tables ● ● GOTO Action - Go to Mailbox (7) (GOTO) Use this option to provide Automated Attendant callers with the ability to route to Call Routing and Announcement Mailboxes. For example, a caller can dial a digit for Sales, and then go to the Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox that provides the dialing options and instructions for Sales.
PAGE 748
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-13: IntraMail Dial Action Tables Input Data Dial Action Table Number 01-16 Key 1-9 = 1-9 10 = 0 11 = * 12 = # 13 = Timeout Item Name Additional Data 01 Dial Action Table Action If Action is set to 0 or 6, the Data setting is skipped.
PAGE 749
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-13: IntraMail Dial Action Tables Conditions None Defaults Dial Action Table Default Settings Key Dial Action Table 1 1 2 3 Dial Action Tables 2-16 0 - UND 0 - UND (Undefined) (Undefined) 0 - UND 0 - UND (Undefined) (Undefined) 2 - UTRF to XXX 0 - UND (Unscreened Transfer to user-dialed extension) (Undefined) 4 2 - UTRF to XXX 0 - UND (Unscreened Transfer to user-dialed extension) (Undefined) 5 6 7 8 9 0 * # TIMEOUT 0 - UND 0 - UND (Undefined) (Undefined)
PAGE 750
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-13: IntraMail Dial Action Tables Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 47-13 (IntraMail Dial Action Tables): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 47 13 47-13-01 Table1 Key 01 Action 0:UND back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 47-13-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 734 ◆ Programming Tablenn − + → Enter the table number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 751
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options 47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use 47-15: Routing Directory Mailbox Options to set up the Routing Mailbox assigned as a Directory Dialing Mailbox in 47-07-02: Routing Mailbox Type. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 752
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options 06 Time Limit for Dialing Commands (Dialing Timeout) This option determines how long IntraMail will wait for the caller connected to the Directory Dialing Mailbox to dial before repeating the Directory Dialing Message. If the caller doesn’t dial within three repeats of the message, IntraMail routes the call to the Next Call Routing Mailbox for the Directory Dialing Mailbox.
PAGE 753
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 47-15 (Routing Directory Mailbox Options): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 47 15 47-15-01 Mailbox1 Min Num Letters 1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 47-15-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Mailboxnn − + → Enter the mailbox number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 754
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-16 : IntraMail Language Assignments 47-16 : IntraMail Language Assignments Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use 47-16: IntraMail Language Assignments to assign voice prompt languages. There are up to 20 possible languages. The Stored Languages you can access is limited by the UX5000’s licensing and the number of languages stored on the IntraMail CompactFlash card. Input Data Language 01-20 Item No.
PAGE 755
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-16 : IntraMail Language Assignments Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 47-16 (IntraMail Language Assignments): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 47 16 47-16-01 Language1 Lang 1 :US English |1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 47-16-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Language1 − + → Enter the language number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 756
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options 47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use 47-17: Routing Distribution Mailbox Options to enter the member extensions into each Distribution List. You can also enter member extensions from the System Administrator’s Mailbox. This option is used when Program 47-07-02>Routing Mailbox Type is set to Type 4 (Distribution). Input Data Mailbox 01-32 Entry 01-20 Item No.
PAGE 757
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 47-17 (Routing Distribution Mailbox Options): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 47 17 47-17-01 Mailbox1 Entry01 MB Ctg 0:UND back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 47-17-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Mailboxnn − + → Enter the mailbox number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 758
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-18 : IntraMail SMTP Setup 47-18 : IntraMail SMTP Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use 47-18: IntraMail SMTP Setup to define the SMTP setting for IntraMail Email notification Input Data Item No.
PAGE 759
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-18 : IntraMail SMTP Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 47-18 (IntraMail SMTP Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 47 18 47-18-01 SMTP Enabled back ↑ ↓ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 47-18-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 0:No select − + → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 760
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-19 : IntraMail POP3 Setup 47-19 : IntraMail POP3 Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use 47-19: IntraMail POP3 Setup to define the POP3 setting for IntraMail Email notification Input Data Item No.
PAGE 761
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-19 : IntraMail POP3 Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 47-19 (IntraMail POP3 Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 47 19 47-19-01 ServerName back ↑ 3. select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 47-19-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. ↓ − + → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 762
Program 47 : IntraMail 47-19 : IntraMail POP3 Setup - For Your Notes - 746 ◆ Programming UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 763
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-01 : CygniLink System Settings Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-01 : CygniLink System Settings Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 51-01 : CygniLink System Settings to define the CygniLink settings. Each UX5000 within the network must be defined. Input Data Related Programs Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 CygniLink System ID This is the ID number that identifies each UX5000 within the CygniLink network.
PAGE 764
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-01 : CygniLink System Settings Feature Cross Reference ● Networking - CygniLink Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 51-01 (CygniLink System Settings): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 51 01 51-01-01 CygniLink SystemID 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 51-01-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 748 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 765
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-02 : CygniLink System Individual Setting 51-02 : CygniLink System Individual Setting Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 51-02 : CygniLink System Individual Setting to define the options for each of the linked UX5000s. Input Data System ID 01-50 Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 System Name Set the desired system name for ease of maintaining information.
PAGE 766
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-02 : CygniLink System Individual Setting Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 51-02 (CygniLink System Individual Setting): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 51 02 51-02-01 SysID1 SystemName0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 51-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 750 ◆ Programming SysIDn → Enter the system ID number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 767
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-03 : CygniLink Internet Protocol Address List Setting 51-03 : CygniLink Internet Protocol Address List Setting Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 51-03 : CygniLink Internet Protocol Address List Setting to define the addresses of the linked UX5000s. When the Fail Over feature is activated, the UX5000 checks this information to establish a new link to the Primary UX5000. Input Data List ID 01-50 Item No.
PAGE 768
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-03 : CygniLink Internet Protocol Address List Setting Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 51-03 (CygniLink Internet Protocol Address List Setting): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 51 03 51-03-01 List ID1 IP Add 0 .0 .0 .0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 51-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 752 ◆ Programming List IDn → Enter the List ID number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 769
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-04 : IP Address for Top Priority Primary System 51-04 : IP Address for Top Priority Primary System Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 51-04 : IP Address for Top Priority Primary System to define the IP address for the highest priority Primary UX5000. At the UX5000 start up, if the IP address of the UX5000 matches this entry, the UX5000 is considered the Primary UX5000.
PAGE 770
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-04 : IP Address for Top Priority Primary System Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 51-04 (IP Address for Top Priority Primary System): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 51 04 51-04-01 PrimaryIP0 .0 .0 .0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 51-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 754 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 771
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-05 : Timer Settings for CygniLink 51-05 : Timer Settings for CygniLink Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 51-05 : Timer Settings for CygniLink to set the various timers used with the CygniLink feature. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 1-3600 5 01 Keep Alive Sending Interval Set the interval for the secondary UX5000 to send the Keep Alive packet to the Primary UX5000 to confirm communication.
PAGE 772
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-05 : Timer Settings for CygniLink Item No. Item Input Data Default 07 Communications Socket Refresh Timer If the IP connection becomes unstable and communication is lost (keep-alive function will not work), the UX5000 retries the connection at this interval. 20-3600 40 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Networking - CygniLink Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 51-05 (Timer Settings for CygniLink): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode.
PAGE 773
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-06 : CygniLink Primary System Automatic Integration Setting 51-06 : CygniLink Primary System Automatic Integration Setting Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 51-06 : CygniLink Primary System Automatic Integration Setting to set the automatic integration. This will allow for multiple primary UX5000s which may have occurred due to Fail Over to be restructured around the recovered top priority Primary UX5000. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 774
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-06 : CygniLink Primary System Automatic Integration Setting Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 51-06 (CygniLink Primary System Automatic Integration Setting): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 51 06 51-06-01 Auto Unification 0:Off back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 51-06-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 758 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 775
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-07 : CygniLink Forced Change of Primary System Settings 51-07 : CygniLink Forced Change of Primary System Settings Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 51-07 : CygniLink Forced Change of Primary System Settings to enable the ability to manually reset the CygniLink’s Primary UX5000. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 776
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-07 : CygniLink Forced Change of Primary System Settings Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 51-07 (CygniLink Forced Change of Primary System Settings): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 51 07 51-07-01 Forced Appoint back ↑ ↓ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 51-07-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 760 ◆ Programming 0:Off select → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 777
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-08 : New Primary System Setting 51-08 : New Primary System Setting Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 51-08 : New Primary System Setting to define the settings for the Primary UX5000 if the Primary is forced manually. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Internet Protocol Address of New Primary When forcing the UX5000 to update to a new Primary UX5000, the UX5000 using the IP address defined here as the new Primary.
PAGE 778
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-08 : New Primary System Setting Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 51-08 (New Primary System Setting): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 51 08 51-08-01 PrimaryIP0 .0 .0 .0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 51-08-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 762 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 779
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-09 : CygniLink TCP Port Settings 51-09 : CygniLink TCP Port Settings Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 51-09 : CygniLink TCP Port Settings to set the various communication ports used with CygniLink. The port numbers should not be changed while CygniLink is running. Once changed, the UX5000 must be reset. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 780
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-09 : CygniLink TCP Port Settings Item No. Item Input Data Default 07 Database Replication Primary System Detection Port Define the port used for communication so that the Primary UX5000 may synchronize the Secondary UX5000 with the UX5000 data. If ‘0’ is entered, the port is selected dynamically. 0-65535 0 Conditions ● The port numbers should not be changed while CygniLink is running. Once changed, the UX5000 must be reset.
PAGE 781
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-10 : Remaining Virtual Slots 51-10 : Remaining Virtual Slots Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 51-10 : Remaining Virtual Slots to view the remaining number of slots which can be controlled by CygniLink. The CygniLink feature can control up to 240 virtual slots maximum. (The physical slots within the CygniLink network are maintained as virtual slots by the UX5000.) This option is not user-definable and is view-only.
PAGE 782
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-11 : CygniLink System Information 51-11 : CygniLink System Information Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 51-11 : CygniLink System Information to view the UX5000 information for UX5000s connecting with the Primary UX5000. These options are not user-definable and are view-only. Input Data System ID Item No. Item 01-50 Input Data Default 20 Alphanumeric Characters or Less blank 0 = No Connection 1 2 = Primary 0 xxx.xxx.xxx.
PAGE 783
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-11 : CygniLink System Information Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 51-11 (CygniLink System Information): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 51 11 51-11-01 SysID1 SystemNameback ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 51-11-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. SysIDn → Enter the System ID number to be viewed or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Press HOLD to view the information. Press HOLD for the next item in the program.
PAGE 784
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-12 : Primary System Information 51-12 : Primary System Information Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 51-12 : Primary System Information to view the information for the Primary UX5000 in a CygniLink network. These options are not user-definable and are view-only. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 1-50 0 20 Alphanumeric Characters or Less blank xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 000.000.000.
PAGE 785
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-12 : Primary System Information Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 51-12 (Primary System Information): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 51 12 51-12-01 System ID back ↑ 3. 0 select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 51-12-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. ↓ → Press HOLD to view the information. Press HOLD for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 786
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-13 : CygniLink Option Settings 51-13 : CygniLink Option Settings Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 51-13 : CygniLink Option Settings to set various options for the CygniLink feature. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Automatic IP Address List Update If this option is enabled, the Internet Protocol address list is updated to include the IP address of a Secondary UX5000 upon connection.
PAGE 787
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-13 : CygniLink Option Settings Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 51-13 (CygniLink Option Settings): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 51 13 51-13-01 IP add Auto Renewal1:On back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 51-13-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 788
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-14 : CygniLink System Control 51-14 : CygniLink System Control Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 51-14 : CygniLink System Control to delete UX5000 information for a network node and its slot information. Input Data System ID 01-50 Item No. Item Input Data 01 Delete System Information Use this option to delete the UX5000 and slot information for a particular UX5000 using the CygniLink feature.
PAGE 789
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-14 : CygniLink System Control Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 51-14 (System Control): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 51 14 51-14-01 SysID1 System Info Delete back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 51-14-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. SysIDn → Enter the System ID number to be viewed or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 790
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-15 : Easy Set Command 51-15 : Easy Set Command Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 51-15 : Easy Set Command to automatically set the minimum settings for the CygniLink feature. This program will set up to 4 systems. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data 01 Easy Setup (for demo use) Select the number of systems to be automatically set up.
PAGE 791
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-15 : Easy Set Command Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 51-15 (Easy Setup Command): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 51 15 51-15-01 Easy Setup back ↑ 3. select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 51-15-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. ↓ → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number. OR Press MIC until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.
PAGE 792
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-16 : CygniLink System Data Replication Mode Setting 51-16 : CygniLink System Data Replication Mode Setting Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 51-16 : CygniLink System Data Replication Mode Setting to define the replication mode to be used for data between the Primary and Secondary UX5000s. Input Data Item Name Input Data Default 01 System Data Replication Mode Use this option to set the replication mode.
PAGE 793
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-16 : CygniLink System Data Replication Mode Setting Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 51-16 (CygniLink System Data Replication Mode Setting): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 51 16 51-16-01 Rep Mode back ↑ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 51-16-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 2:Interval select ↓ → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 794
Program 51 : CygniLink Service 51-16 : CygniLink System Data Replication Mode Setting - For Your Notes - 778 ◆ Programming UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 795
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-01 : Service Tone Setup Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-01 : Service Tone Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 80-01 : Service Tone Setup to define up to 64 Service Tones. Each service tone is defined by the combination of 32 Basic Tones. Input Data Service Tone Number Item No. 01 01-64 Item Input Data Repeat Count 0-255 (0 is endless) Unit Number Item No.
PAGE 796
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-01 : Service Tone Setup Basic Tone No. Frequency (Hz) Level (dB) Basic Tone No. Frequency (Hz) Level (dB) 11 480 / 620 -21 / -21 27 - reserve - - 12 440 -16 28 - reserve - - 13 - reserve - - 29 - reserve - - 14 520 / 650 -19 / -13 30 - reserve - - 15 650 / 780 -19 / -13 31 - reserve - - 16 780 / 1040 -19 / -13 32 - reserve - - Default Service Tone No. Service Tone Repeat Count Unit Count Basic Tone No.
PAGE 797
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-01 : Service Tone Setup Service Tone No. Service Tone Repeat Count Unit Count Basic Tone No.
PAGE 798
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-01 : Service Tone Setup Service Tone No. Service Tone Repeat Count Unit Count Basic Tone No.
PAGE 799
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-01 : Service Tone Setup Service Tone No. Service Tone Repeat Count Unit Count Basic Tone No. Duration Gain Level (dB) 32 Splash Tone 1 1 Basic 1 Basic 2 Basic 3 0 6 0 1 1 0 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 33 Splash Tone 2 2 Basic 1 Basic 2 Basic 3 0 6 0 1 1 0 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 34 Splash Tone 3 3 Basic 1 Basic 2 Basic 3 0 6 0 1 1 0 32 (0dB) 32 (0dB) 35 1 Second Signal Tone Used for Long Conversation Warning Tone.
PAGE 800
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-01 : Service Tone Setup Service Tone No. Service Tone Repeat Count Unit Count Basic Tone No.
PAGE 801
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-01 : Service Tone Setup Service Tone No. Service Tone Repeat Count Unit Count Basic Tone No.
PAGE 802
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup 80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup to define the duration (on time) and pause (off time) for DTMF dialing. This option affects all trunk line calls system wide. You make separate entries for duration and pause. It is also possible to adjust the level of both high and low frequency tone. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 803
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 80-02 (DTMF Tone Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 80 02 80-02-01 Duration Time 5 back ↑ ↓ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 80-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. select → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 804
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup 80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup to define the various levels and timers for the DTMF Tone Receiver Input Data DTMF Tone Receiver Type Number Item No.
PAGE 805
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Default Item No. Item Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5 01 Detect Level 0 0 0 0 0 02 Start delay time 0 0 0 0 0 03 Min. detect level 10(-20dBm) 15(-25dBm) 10(-20dBm) 10(-20dBm) 10(-20dBm) 04 Max.
PAGE 806
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 80-03 (DTMF Tone Receiver Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 80 03 80-03-01 PB Receiver 1 Detect level 0:0/-30 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 80-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 790 ◆ Programming PB Receiver n − + → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 807
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup 80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup to define the various levels and timers for the Call Progress Tone Detector Input Data Tone Detector Type No Item No. Item 01 Detect Level 02 Min.
PAGE 808
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup 11 -- Reserve -- 0-8 12 -- Not Used in U.S. -- - 13 -- Not Used in U.S. -- - 14 -- Not Used in U.S. -- - Default Item No. Item Type1 (DT) Type2 (BT) Type3 (RBT) Type4 Type5 01 Detect Level 0 (0..-25dBm) 0 (0..-25dBm) 0 (0..-25dBm) 0 0 02 Min.
PAGE 809
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Feature Cross Reference ● Selectable Ring Tones Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 80-04 (Call Progress Tone Detector Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 80 04 80-04-01 Tone Rcv1 Detect level 0:0/-30 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 80-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 810
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System Reports 80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System Reports Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System Reports to define the date format when printing out the SMDR, alarm report, UX5000 information report, etc. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 811
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup 80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup Level: MF Feature Availability • Not Available. Description This option is not used in the U.S.
PAGE 812
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-09 : Short Ring Setup 80-09 : Short Ring Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Not Available. Description Use Program 80-09 : Short Ring Setup to define the short ring for UX5000 multi-line terminals. Input Data Short Ring Number 01 - 32 Input Data Item No.
PAGE 813
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-09 : Short Ring Setup Default Short Ring No. Short Tone Name Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Ring Cycle 01 Confirmation sound 8 8 1 02 Error tone 8 8 14 03 Terminal call warning sound for a long time 4 4 14 04 Not Defined 0 0 0 : : : 0 0 0 : 32 Not Defined Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Central Office Calls, Answering Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 80-09 (Short Ring Setup): 1. 2.
PAGE 814
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-10 : MF Tone Receiver Setup 80-10 : MF Tone Receiver Setup Level: Feature Availability MF • Not Available. Description Use Program 80-10 : MF Tone Receiver Setup to define the various levels and timers for the MF Tone Receiver Input Data MF Tone Receiver Type Number 1 = MF Receiver for Extension 2 = MF Receiver for Trunk 3 = -- Reserve -4 = -- Reserve -5 = -- Reserve -- Input Data Item No.
PAGE 815
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-10 : MF Tone Receiver Setup Default Item Name Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5 01 Detect Level 0 0 0 0 0 02 Start Delay Time 0 0 0 0 0 03 Min. Detect Level 10 (-20dBm) 10 (-20dBm) 10 (-20dBm) 10 (-20dBm) 10 (-20dBm) 04 Max.
PAGE 816
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System 80-10 : MF Tone Receiver Setup - For Your Notes - 800 ◆ Programming UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 817
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-01 : COIU Initial Data Setup Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-01 : COIU Initial Data Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 81-01 : COIU Initial Data Setup to define the various basic timers for COIU blades. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 818
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-01 : COIU Initial Data Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 15 Flash (Hooking 2) This sets the flash (Hooking 2) duration for analog trunk calls. See Program 14-02-04.
PAGE 819
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-01 : COIU Initial Data Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 81-01 (COIU Initial Data Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 81 01 81-01-01 Encoding Type 0: U-LAW back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 81-01-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 820
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup 81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup to define the various basic timers for the DIOPU cards. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 821
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup Item No. Item 23 DP Inter-Digit Time (20pps) Input Data Default 1-255 (16-4080mS) 29 (464mS) Conditions ● This program will not be displayed in PCPro/WebPro until signing in with the MF level password. Feature Cross Reference ● Central Office Calls, Placing Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 81-02 (DIOPU Initial Data Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode.
PAGE 822
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-03 : 4TLIU Initial Data Setup 81-03 : 4TLIU Initial Data Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 81-03 : 4TLIU Initial Data Setup to define the various basic timers for the E&M tie line blade. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 823
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-03 : 4TLIU Initial Data Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Tie Lines Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 81-03 (4TLIU Initial Data Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 81 03 81-03-01 Encoding Type 0: U-Law back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 81-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 824
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup 81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup to define the various basic options for layer 1 of ISDN BRI. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Wait Time for Physical Activation (Timer 3) 1-255 (200-5100ms) 100 (20 sec.
PAGE 825
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup 81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup to define the various basic options for layer 2 of ISDN BRI/PRI. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Timer T200 1-255 (100-25500ms) 10 (1sec.) 02 Timer T201 1-255 (100-25500ms) 10 (1sec.
PAGE 826
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 81-05 (ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 81 05 81-05-01 Timer T200 back ↑ 3. ← 810 ◆ Programming ↓ select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 81-05-nn nnnnn 4. 5. 10 → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 827
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup 81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup to define the various basic timers for layer 3 of ISDN BRI/PRI (defined in Program 10-03-04). Input Data Layer 3 Timer Type Number 1-5 Item No.
PAGE 828
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● ISDN Compatibility Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 81-06 (ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 81 06 81-06-01 L3 Timer1 T301 180Sec. back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 81-06-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 829
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-07 : Codec Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Ports 81-07 : Codec Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Ports Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 81-07 : Codec Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Ports to define the codec (QSLAC) filter for each analog trunk port. Input Data Trunk Port Number Item No.
PAGE 830
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-07 : Codec Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Ports Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 81-07 (Codec FilterSetup for Analog Trunk Ports): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 81 07 81-07-01 Trunk1 CODEC Filter 2:4dB Loss back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 81-07-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 814 ◆ Programming Trunknnn − + → Enter the trunk port number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 831
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup 81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup to define the various basic timers for each T1 trunk type. Input Data Layer 3 Timer Type Number Item No.
PAGE 832
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup Item No.
PAGE 833
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup Item No.
PAGE 834
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● T1 Trunking Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 81-08 (T1 Trunk Timer Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 81 08 81-08-01 Ans Sig Detect LOOP 15 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 81-08-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 818 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 835
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-09 : COIU Codec Filter Data Setup 81-09 : COIU Codec Filter Data Setup Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description The UX5000 will use the settings in Program 81-09 : COIU Codec Filter Data Setup when Program 81-07-01 : Codec Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Ports is set to "4 - Specified Data". These values should not be changed from their default settings unless directed by NEC’S Technical Service department.
PAGE 836
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81-09 : COIU Codec Filter Data Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● ● Central Office Calls, Answering Central Office Calls, Placing Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 81-09 (COIU Codec Filter Data Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 81 09 81-09-01 B1 Filter(01) back ↑ 3. ← 820 ◆ Programming 171 select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 81-09-nn nnnnn 4. 5.
PAGE 837
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone to set the incoming ring tones, which are the tones a user hears when a call rings an extension. These tones are grouped into four ring tone Ranges (1-4), also called patterns, that consist of a combination of frequencies.
PAGE 838
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone Default Incoming Ringing Tone Number Tone Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation Pattern 1 (Trunk Incoming) High Mid Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 16Hz Modulation 16Hz Modulation 16Hz Modulation Pattern 2 (Trunk Incoming) High Mid Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation Pattern 3 (Trunk Incoming) High Mid Low 2000 1400 1100 760 660 540 16Hz Modulation 16Hz Modulation 16Hz Modulat
PAGE 839
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 82-01 (Incoming Ring Tone): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 82 01 82-01-01 INC Freq 1 INC-Rng1 Freq1:5:1100Hz back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 82-01-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. INC Freq − + n → Enter the Frequency number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 840
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup 82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup to define the LED patterns for special functions on a DSS console. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 841
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup Conditions ● This program will not be displayed in PCPro/WebPro until signing in with the MF level password. Feature Cross Reference ● Direct Station Selection (DSS) Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 82-03 (DSS Console LED Pattern Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 82 03 82-03-01 ACD Log-In back ↑ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 82-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5.
PAGE 842
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-04 : SLIU Initial Data Setup 82-04 : SLIU Initial Data Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 82-04 : SLIU Initial Data Setup to define the various basic timers for the ASTU blade. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 843
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-04 : SLIU Initial Data Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 82-04 (SLIU Initial Data Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 82 04 82-04-01 Encoding Type 0: U-Law back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 82-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 844
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup 82-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 82-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup to define the various basic options for the layer 2 of ISDN BRI/PRI S-Point. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Timer T200 1-255 (100-25500ms) 10 (1 sec.
PAGE 845
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 82-05 (ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 82 05 82-05-01 Timer T200 back ↑ 3. ↓ select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 82-05-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 10 → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 846
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (S-Point) Timer Setup 82-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (S-Point) Timer Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 82-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (S-Point) Timer Setup to define the various basic timers for layer 3 of ISDN BRI/PRI S-Point (defined in Program 10-03-04). Input Data Layer 3 Timer Type Number 1-5 Item No.
PAGE 847
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (S-Point) Timer Setup Feature Cross Reference ● ISDN Compatibility Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 82-06 (ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (S-Point) Timer Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 82 06 82-06-01 L3 Timer1 T301 180 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 82-06-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 848
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-07 : Codec Filter Setup for Analog Station Ports 82-07 : Codec Filter Setup for Analog Station Ports Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 82-07 : Codec Filter Setup for Analog Station Ports to define the codec (QSLAC) filter for each analog extension port. Input Data Extension Port Number Item No.
PAGE 849
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-07 : Codec Filter Setup for Analog Station Ports Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 82-07 (Codec Filter Setup for Analog Station Ports): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 82 07 82-07-01 Extn Port1 CODEC Filter 1:00dB Loss back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 82-07-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Extn Portnnn − + → Enter the extension port number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 850
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup 82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Program 82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup allows adjust of the keyset sidetone volume. There are two levels, based on whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or analog trunk.
PAGE 851
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 82-08 (Sidetone Volume Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 82 08 82-08-01 Sidetone Vol 5:-24/-36|1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 83-08-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 852
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-09 : SLIU Codec Filter Data Setup 82-09 : SLIU Codec Filter Data Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description The UX5000 will use the settings in the new Program 82-09 : SLIU Codec Filter Data Setup when Program 82-07-01 : Codec Filter Setup for Analog Station Ports is set to "4 - Specified Data". These values should not be changed from their default settings unless directed by NEC’S Technical Service department.
PAGE 853
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-09 : SLIU Codec Filter Data Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● ● Central Office Calls, Answering Central Office Calls, Placing Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 82-07 (SLIU Codec Filter Data Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 82 07 82-07-01 Extn Port1 CODEC Filter 1:0db Loss back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 82-07-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 854
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82-09 : SLIU Codec Filter Data Setup - For Your Notes - 838 ◆ Programming UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 855
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-01 : Codec Information Basic Setup Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-01 : Codec Information Basic Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-01 : Codec Information Basic Setup to define the data of H.323 trunks. Refer to Program 84-12 for H.323 extensions and IP CygniLink Codecs. Note that the value of Item 33 (Audio Capability Priority) determines which codec settings to use. This means, for example, that if G.
PAGE 856
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-01 : Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 10 -- Not Used -- 11 Number of G.723 Audio Frame Maximum number of the G.723 Audio Frame. 1 = 30 msec 2 = 60 msec 1 12 G.723 Silence Compression Mode If enabled, RTP packets are not sent for the compressed silence. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 13 -- Not Used -- 14 -- Not Used -- 15 Jitter Buffer Mode Set the mode of the Jitter Buffer. 1 = Size set to the fixed amount for the codec.
PAGE 857
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-01 : Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 24 Echo Canceller Mode Determine whether or not to use Echo canceller. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 25 Echo Canceller Tail Size Becomes invalid item if 81-01-24 is set to Disabled. Set the decrease echo when delayed. 1 = 4ms 2 = 8ms 3 = 16ms 4 = 32ms 5 = 64ms 6 = 128ms 6 26 Echo Canceller NLP Mode Non-linear processing mode. Enable this option to decrease the low level echo.
PAGE 858
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-01 : Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 0-65535 kbps 0 24 = V.27ter, 2400 bps 48 = V.27ter, 4800 bps 72 = V.29, 7200 bps 96 = V.29, 9600 bps 120 = V17, 12000 bps 144 = V.17, 14400 bps 5 0-600 ms 300 ms 20-48 bytes 20 34 Bandwidth Control Controls the voice bandwidth on an H.323 trunk. 35 Maximum Bandwidth The maximum total bandwidth limitation for voice packets.
PAGE 859
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-01 : Codec Information Basic Setup Item No.
PAGE 860
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-01 : Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 63 G.722 Audio Frame Maximum number of G.722 Audio Frames. G.722 assumes the audio signal made by a specimen by 16kHz and the frame of 10ms is assumed to be a unit to 64kbps by the encoding compressed method. 1 = 10 ms 2 = 20 ms 3 = 30 ms 4 = 40 ms 3 64 G.722 Silence Compression Mode Select whether to compress silence with G.722. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent.
PAGE 861
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-01 : Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. 77 Item iLBC Jitter Buffer - Maximum Set the maximum iLBC Jitter Buffer.
PAGE 862
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-02 : H.225, H.245 Information Basic Setup 84-02 : H.225, H.245 Information Basic Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-02 : H.225, H.245 Information Basic Setup to define the data of H.225 and H.245. It is recommended that these settings are left at the default values unless you are advised to change the values by NEC Infrontia. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 H.
PAGE 863
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-02 : H.225, H.245 Information Basic Setup Item No.
PAGE 864
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-02 : H.225, H.245 Information Basic Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-02 (H.225, H.245 Information Basic Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 02 84-02-01 H225 Alert Time 180sec. back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-02-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 848 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 865
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-03 : IP Terminal Information Basic Setup 84-03 : IP Terminal Information Basic Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-03 : IP Terminal Information Basic Setup to define the details of the UX5000 IP terminal. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 NGT Signal Receive Port Number Define the receiving port for IP control protocol.
PAGE 866
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-03 : IP Terminal Information Basic Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-03 (NGT Information Basic Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 03 84-03-01 NGT_Recv_Port back ↑ ↓ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 850 ◆ Programming select → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 867
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-07 : Firmware Download Setup 84-07 : Firmware Download Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-07 : Firmware Download Setup to setup the download data for the IP terminal. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 0 = TFTP 1 = FTP 0 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255255.254 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 Description 01 Server Mode 02 File Server 03 Log-in Name 20 Characters Max.
PAGE 868
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-07 : Firmware Download Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-07 (Firmware Download Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 07 84-07-01 Server Mode back ↑ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-07-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 852 ◆ Programming 0:TFTP select ↓ → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 869
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-08 : Firmware Name Setup 84-08 : Firmware Name Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-08 : Firmware Name Setup to setup the firmware name of the IP terminal for download. Input Data Terminal Type Item No.
PAGE 870
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-08 : Firmware Name Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-08 (Firmware Download Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 08 84-08-01 Term Type1 FirmWare Dir back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-08-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 854 ◆ Programming Term Typen → Enter the terminal type to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 871
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-09 : VLAN Setup 84-09 : VLAN Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-09 : VLAN Setup to setup the VLAN data. Input Data Interface Number • • 1-2 I/F No.1: The packets sent from the LAN interface on the CCPU is set to the VLAN Tag. (VOIPDB 32 channel) I/F No.2: The packets sent from the LAN interface on the VOIPDB is set to the VLAN Tag. (VoIPDB 32ch/64ch/128ch) Item No.
PAGE 872
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-09 : VLAN Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-09 (VLAN Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 09 84-09-01 VLAN Mode back ↑ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-09-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 856 ◆ Programming 0:Off select ↓ → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 873
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-10 : ToS Setup 84-10 : ToS Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-10 : ToS Setup to setup the ToS data. Input Data Protocol Type Item No. Item 1 = DRS 2 = Protims 3 = Voice Control 4 = H.
PAGE 874
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-10 : ToS Setup Feature Cross Reference ● VoIP Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-10 (ToS Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 10 84-10-01 Protocol Type1 ToS Mode 0:Invalid back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-10-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 858 ◆ Programming Protocol Typen − + → Enter the Protocol Type number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 875
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-11 : Dterm IP Codec Information Basic Setup 84-11 : Dterm IP Codec Information Basic Setup Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 84-11 : Dterm IP Codec Information Basic Setup to setup the basic codec options for the Dterm IP terminal. Input Data Type 1 = Type 1 2 = Type 2 3 = Type 3 4 = Type 4 5 = Type 5 Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Number of G.711 Audio Frame Maximum number of G711 Audio Frames.
PAGE 876
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-11 : Dterm IP Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 07 G.729 Audio Frame Maximum number of G729 Audio Frames. G.729 assumes the audio signal made by a specimen by 8kHz and the frame of 10ms is assumed to be a unit to 8kbps by the encoding compressed method. 1-6 (1 = 10ms, 2 = 20ms, etc.) 3 08 G.729 Silence Compression (VAD) Mode Select whether to compress silence with G.729. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent.
PAGE 877
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-11 : Dterm IP Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 16 G.723 Jitter Buffer - Maximum Set the maximum value of the G.723 Jitter Buffer. Moreover, this option is adjusted with the UX5000 as it is used by both IP terminals and the VOIPDB and the range of the adjustment of Jitter for the IP terminal is narrower and transmitted to the IP terminal. The range of IP terminal is 10-300 (10).
PAGE 878
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-11 : Dterm IP Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 24 Echo Canceller NLP Noise Setting Becomes invalid item if 84-11-22 is set to Disabled. Set the noise level adjusting method added with NLP. When “0” is set, the level is self-adjusted - when “1” is set, Program 84-11-23 is used. 0 = adaptive 1 = fixed 0 25 - Not Used - - - 26 TX (Transmit) Gain Define the setting to amplify and to attenuate the size of the transmission voice.
PAGE 879
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-11 : Dterm IP Codec Information Basic Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● VoIP Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-11 (Dterm IP Codec Information Basic Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 11 84-11-01 Type1 G711 Audio Frame 3 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-11-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Typen − + → Enter the type number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 880
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-12 : Networking Codec Information Basic Setup 84-12 : Networking Codec Information Basic Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-12 : Networking Codec Information Basic Setup to setup the codec information for IP networking. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Number of G.711 Audio Frame Maximum number of G711 Audio Frames.
PAGE 881
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-12 : Networking Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 12 Number of G.723 Audio Frame Maximum number of the G.723 Audio Frame. 1 = 30 msec 2 = 60 msec 1 13 G.723 Silence Compression (VAD) Mode If enabled, RTP packets are not sent for the compressed silence. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 14 G.723 Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the G.723 Jitter Buffer. 0~270 ms 30 15 G.
PAGE 882
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-12 : Networking Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 - - 0 = adaptive 1 = fixed 0 - 20 (0 dbm) 22 Echo Canceller NLP Mode Non-linear processing mode. Enable this option to decrease the low level echo. When NLP is enabled, the voice with low level is replacecd with NLP noise. As a result, a low echo of the level is usually removed compared with the conversation level.
PAGE 883
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-12 : Networking Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 29 Echo Canceller Config Type The type is defined in Program 84-17. • 0: Automatic If the call is analog (e.g. COIU or 2-wire tie line) then this selects the echo canceller profile configured in Program 84-17 Type 4 (“Analog Path Setting”). Any other call selects the echo canceller profile configured in Program 84-17 Type 5 (“Digital Path Setting”).
PAGE 884
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-12 : Networking Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 39 G.726 Silence Compression Mode Select whether to compress silence with G.726. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 40 G.726 Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of G.726 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed.
PAGE 885
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-12 : Networking Codec Information Basic Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-12 (Networking Codec Information Basic Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 12 84-12-01 G711 Audio Frame 3 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-12-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 886
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-13 : SIP Trunk Codec Information Basic Setup 84-13 : SIP Trunk Codec Information Basic Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-13 : SIP Trunk Codec Information Basic Setup to setup the basic codec options for SIP trunks. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Number of G.711 Audio Frame Maximum number of G711 Audio Frames.
PAGE 887
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-13 : SIP Trunk Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 12 Number of G.723 Audio Frame Maximum number of the G.723 Audio Frame. 1 = 30 msec 2 = 60 msec 1 13 G.723 Silence Compression (VAD) Mode If enabled, RTP packets are not sent for the compressed silence. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 14 G.723 Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the G.723 Jitter Buffer. 0~270 ms 30 15 G.
PAGE 888
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-13 : SIP Trunk Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 22 Echo Canceller NLP Mode Non-linear processing mode. Enable this option to decrease the low level echo. When NLP is enabled, the voice with low level is replacecd with NLP noise. As a result, a low echo of the level is usually removed compared with the conversation level.
PAGE 889
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-13 : SIP Trunk Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 29 Echo Canceller Config Type The type is defined in Program 84-17. • 0: Automatic If the call is analog (e.g. COIU or 2-wire tie line) then this selects the echo canceller profile configured in Program 84-17 Type 4 (“Analog Path Setting”). Any other call selects the echo canceller profile configured in Program 84-17 Type 5 (“Digital Path Setting”).
PAGE 890
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-13 : SIP Trunk Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 39 G.726 Silence Compression Mode Select whether to compress silence with G.726. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent. 40 G.726 Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of G.726 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed. 0-160 ms 30 41 G.
PAGE 891
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-13 : SIP Trunk Codec Information Basic Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-13 (SIP Trunk Codec Information Basic Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 13 84-13-01 G711 Audio Frame back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-13-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 892
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup 84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup to define the basic setup for SIP trunks. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 INVITE ReTx Count Set the INVITE Re TX Count. 0-255 7 02 Request ReTX Count Set the Request Re TX Count. 0-255 11 03 Response ReTX Count Set the Response Re TX Count.
PAGE 893
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup Feature Cross Reference ● VoIP Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-14 (SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 14 84-14-01 INVITE ReTX Count back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-14-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 894
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-15 : H.323 Keep Alive Setup 84-15 : H.323 Keep Alive Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-15 : H.323 Keep Alive Setup to setup the conditions for keeping a call to an H.323 terminals alive when NetMeeting does not answer. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Automatic Deletion of Registration Information Determine if the H.323 terminal registration information should be automatically deleted.
PAGE 895
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-15 : H.323 Keep Alive Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-15 (H.323 Keep Alive Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 15 84-15-01 KeepAlive AutoDel 0:Off back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-15-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 896
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-16 : VOIPDB Limiter Control Gain Setup 84-16 : VOIPDB Limiter Control Gain Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-16 : VOIPDB Limiter Control Gain Setup to set the gains for the VOIPDB daughter board. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 RX Limiter Control Gain This option controls the limiter gain for IP to PCM direction.
PAGE 897
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-16 : VOIPDB Limiter Control Gain Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-16 (VOIPDB Limiter Control Gain Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 16 84-16-01 RX Limiter Gain back ↑ ↓ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-16-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 15 select → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 898
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-17 : VOIPDB Echo Canceller Control Setup 84-17 : VOIPDB Echo Canceller Control Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-17 : VOIPDB Echo Canceller Control Setup to set the enhanced Echo Canceller function for the VOIPDB daughter board. The Type defined here is assigned in Program 84-01-60 (H.323 trunks), 84-11-29 (DtermIP), and 84-12-29 (H.323 terminals). Input Data Type Item No.
PAGE 899
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-17 : VOIPDB Echo Canceller Control Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-17 (VOIPDB Echo Canceller Control Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 17 84-17-01 Type1 EC Mode 1:Enable back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-17-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Typen − + → Enter the type to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 900
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-19 : SIP Extension Codec Information Basic Setup 84-19 : SIP Extension Codec Information Basic Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-19 : SIP Extension Codec information Basic Setup to define the codec information for the SIP extensions. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Number of G.711 Audio Frame Maximum number of G711 Audio Frames.
PAGE 901
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-19 : SIP Extension Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 12 Number of G.723 Audio Frame Maximum number of the G.723 Audio Frame. 1 = 30 msec 2 = 60 msec 1 13 G.723 Silence Compression (VAD) Mode If enabled, RTP packets are not sent for the compressed silence. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 14 G.723 Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the G.723 Jitter Buffer. 0~270 ms 30 15 G.
PAGE 902
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-19 : SIP Extension Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 22 Echo Canceller NLP Mode Non-linear processing mode. Enable this option to decrease the low level echo. When NLP is enabled, the voice with low level is replacecd with NLP noise. As a result, a low echo of the level is usually removed compared with the conversation level.
PAGE 903
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-19 : SIP Extension Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 29 Echo Canceller Config Type The type is defined in Program 84-17. • 0: Automatic If the call is analog (e.g. COIU or 2-wire tie line) then this selects the echo canceller profile configured in Program 84-17 Type 4 (“Analog Path Setting”). Any other call selects the echo canceller profile configured in Program 84-17 Type 5 (“Digital Path Setting”).
PAGE 904
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-19 : SIP Extension Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 39 G.726 Silence Compression (VAD) Mode Select whether to compress silence with G.726. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent. 40 G.726 Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of G.726 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed.
PAGE 905
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-19 : SIP Extension Codec Information Basic Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-19 (SIP Extension Codec Information Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 19 84-19-01 G711 Audio Frame 3 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-19-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 906
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup 84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup to define the basic options for the SIP extensions. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Registrar/Proxy Port Set the Registrar/Proxy Port. (This entry should not be the same as the port entry in Program 84-14-06.
PAGE 907
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-20 (SIP Extension Basic Information Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 20 84-20-01 Reg/Prx Port back ↑ 3. select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-20-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. ↓ → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 908
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-22 : DT700 Logon Information Setup 84-22 : DT700 Logon Information Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-22 : DT700 Logon Information Setup to define the log on information for DT700 terminals. This program is used only when “Automatic Logon” is set in Program 10-46-01. Input Data Personal ID Index 1-512 Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Personal User ID Define the personal ID for the extension when log on is set.
PAGE 909
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-22 : DT700 Logon Information Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● VoIP Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-22 (DT700 Logon Information Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 22 84-22-01 UserID1 UserID back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-22-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. UserIDn → Enter the User ID number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 910
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-23 : DT700 Basic Information Setup 84-23 : DT700 Basic Information Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-23 : DT700 Basic Information Setup to set the basic information for DT700 terminals. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 911
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-23 : DT700 Basic Information Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 11 Password Lock Time Define the number of times the password can be entered incorrectly at a protected terminal. 0 = There is no limitation 1-255 0 12 Tracking Number Define the Manager's telephone number. Dial of 32 digits or less (0-9,*,#,P,R,@) None 13 Media ToS Set the ToS value applied from the DT700 terminal to the RTP packet sent to a main device.
PAGE 912
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-24 : SIP-MLT Codec Information Basic Setup 84-24 : SIP-MLT Codec Information Basic Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-24 : SIP-MLT Codec information Basic Setup to define the codec information for the SIP multi-line terminals. Input Data Type 1 = Type 1 2 = Type 2 3 = Type 3 4 = Type 4 5 = Type 5 Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Number of G.711 Audio Frame Maximum number of G711 Audio Frames.
PAGE 913
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-24 : SIP-MLT Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 09 G.729 Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of G.729 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed. 0-270 ms 20 10 G.729 Jitter Buffer - Standard Set the average G.729 Jitter Buffer. 0-270 ms 40 11 G.729 Jitter Buffer - Maximum Set the maximum G.729 Jitter Buffer.
PAGE 914
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-24 : SIP-MLT Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 22 Echo Canceller NLP Mode Non-linear processing mode. Enable this option to decrease the low level echo. When NLP is enabled, the voice with low level is replacecd with NLP noise. As a result, a low echo of the level is usually removed compared with the conversation level.
PAGE 915
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-24 : SIP-MLT Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 29 Echo Canceller Config Type The type is defined in Program 84-17. • 0: Automatic If the call is analog (e.g. COIU or 2-wire tie line) then this selects the echo canceller profile configured in Program 84-17 Type 4 (“Analog Path Setting”). Any other call selects the echo canceller profile configured in Program 84-17 Type 5 (“Digital Path Setting”).
PAGE 916
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-24 : SIP-MLT Codec Information Basic Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-24 (SIP-MLT Codec Information Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 24 84-24-01 G711 Audio Frame 3 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-24-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 900 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 917
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-25 : CygniLink Codec Information Basic Setup 84-25 : CygniLink Codec Information Basic Setup Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 84-25 : CygniLink Codec information Basic Setup to define the codec information for the CygniLink feature. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Number of G.711 Audio Frame Maximum number of G711 Audio Frames.
PAGE 918
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-25 : CygniLink Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 12 Number of G.723 Audio Frame Maximum number of the G.723 Audio Frame. 1 = 30 msec 2 = 60 msec 1 13 G.723 Silence Compression (VAD) Mode If enabled, RTP packets are not sent for the compressed silence. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 14 G.723 Jitter Buffer - Minimum Set the minimum value of the G.723 Jitter Buffer. 0~ ms 30 15 G.
PAGE 919
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-25 : CygniLink Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 22 Echo Canceller NLP Mode Non-linear processing mode. Enable this option to decrease the low level echo. When NLP is enabled, the voice with low level is replacecd with NLP noise. As a result, a low echo of the level is usually removed compared with the conversation level.
PAGE 920
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-25 : CygniLink Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 29 Echo Canceller Config Type The type is defined in Program 84-17. • 0: Automatic If the call is analog (e.g. COIU or 2-wire tie line) then this selects the echo canceller profile configured in Program 84-17 Type 4 (“Analog Path Setting”). Any other call selects the echo canceller profile configured in Program 84-17 Type 5 (“Digital Path Setting”).
PAGE 921
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-25 : CygniLink Codec Information Basic Setup Item No. Item Input Data Default 38 G.726 Audio Frame Maximum number of G.726 Audio Frames. G.726 assumes the audio signal made by a specimen by 16kHz and the frame of 10ms is assumed to be a unit to 32kbps by the encoding compressed method. 1 = 10 ms 2 = 20 ms 3 = 30 ms 4 = 40 ms 3 39 G.726 Silence Compression Mode Select whether to compress silence with G.726. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent.
PAGE 922
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-25 : CygniLink Codec Information Basic Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-19 (SIP Extension Codec Information Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 19 84-19-01 G711 Audio Frame 3 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-19-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 906 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 923
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-26 : VOIPDB Setup for Each DSP 84-26 : VOIPDB Setup for Each DSP Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-26 : VOIPDB Setup for Each DSP to setup the details for each DSP. Input Data Slot Number 1 VoIP Gateway Number 1-8 Item No. 01 Item Internet Protocol Address Only with the CygniLink feature: Define the IP address of each DSP on a VOIPDB. Input Data Default 0.0.0.1 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 192.0.0.
PAGE 924
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-26 : VOIPDB Setup for Each DSP Feature Cross Reference ● VoIP Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-26 (VOIPDB Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 26 84-26-01 Slot No. 1 GW1 IP 172.16 .0 .20 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-26-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 908 ◆ Programming Slot No. 1 − + → Enter the slot number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 925
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-27 : VOIPDB Setup 84-27 : VOIPDB Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-27 : VOIPDB Setup to define the basic options for the VoIP daughter board. Input Data Slot Number 1 Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 DTMF Relay Setting If option 1 is selected (In-Band DTMF Relay), it is not reported to the host processor. If option 2 is selected (Out-of-Band DTMF Relay), tones are not passed as voice.
PAGE 926
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-27 : VOIPDB Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-27 (VOIPDB Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 27 84-27-01 Slot No. 1 DTMF RelaySetup2:OutBand back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-27-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 910 ◆ Programming Slot No. n → Enter the slot number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 927
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-28 : DT700 Firmware Name Setup 84-28 : DT700 Firmware Name Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-28 : DT700 Firmware Name Setup to set the firmware name of IP terminal (DT700) for download. Input Data Terminal Type Item No. 1 = IP3NA-*TIXH/TIH(*:2 or 6) 2 = IP3NA-*TIXH(*:8 ,12 or 24) 3 = IP3NA-320TISXH1 Item 01 Firmware Directory Define the directory where the downloaded firmware file is stored.
PAGE 928
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-28 : DT700 Firmware Name Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-28 (DT700 Firmware Name Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 28 84-28-01 Term Type1 Firmware Dir back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-28-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 7. 912 ◆ Programming Term Typen → Enter the terminal type number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 929
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-29 : SIP-MLT Codec Information Fixed Mode Setup 84-29 : SIP-MLT Codec Information Fixed Mode Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 84-29 : SIP-MLT Codec Information Fixed Mode Setup to set codec information of the SIP-MLT when the multicast is used. Input Data Type Item No.
PAGE 930
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP 84-29 : SIP-MLT Codec Information Fixed Mode Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 84-29 (SIP-MLT Codec Information Fixed Mode Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 84 29 84-29-01 Type1 Audio Capa 2:G.711 u-law back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 84-29-nn nnnnn ← Typen → 4. Select the type number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME VOLUME ▼ keys. 5. 6. 7.
PAGE 931
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-01 : Installation Date Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-01 : Installation Date Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-01 : Installation Date to define the installation date of UX5000. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 932
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-02 : Setting the Programming Password 90-02 : Setting the Programming Password Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-02 : Setting the Programming Password to set the UX5000 passwords. For password entry purposes, the UX5000 allows 8 users to be defined. Each user can have a: ● Unique alphanumeric name (up to 10 alphanumeric characters long.
PAGE 933
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-02 : Setting the Programming Password Default User No.
PAGE 934
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-03 : Save Data 90-03 : Save Data Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 90-03 : Save Data to save the programmed data on the SRAM and Flash ROM to the 16M ATA Removable Compact Flash Memory card. This program should be used after changing the programmed data. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 935
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-04 : Load Data 90-04 : Load Data Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 90-04 : Load Data to load the UX5000 data from the inserted Compact Flash Memory to the SRAM and Flash ROM in the UX5000. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 936
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-04 : Load Data Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-04 (Load Data): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 04 90-04-01 Data Load YES:1 back ↑ ↓ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-04-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 920 ◆ Programming select → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 937
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-05 : Slot Control 90-05 : Slot Control Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-05 : Slot Control to reset, delete (uninstall), block or release block for circuit boards (slots 1-24). Delete allows you to completely uninstall the blade. You might want to do this if you want to remove a blade and plug it into a different slot - and still retain the port assignments.
PAGE 938
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-05 : Slot Control Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-05 (Slot Control): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 05 90-05-01 Menu 1 Slot Number back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-05-nn Menu n Slot Number ← 4. 5. 6. 922 ◆ Programming − + → Enter the Menu number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter the slot number for the blade + HOLD.
PAGE 939
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-06 : Trunk Control 90-06 : Trunk Control Level: SA Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 90-06 : Trunk Control is used for the trunk maintenance. Busy Out lets you block a blade from placing outgoing calls (just like placing the blade switch down). Once busied out, none of the ports on the blade can be used for new calls. Existing calls, however, are not torn down. Input Data Menu Number Item No.
PAGE 940
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-06 : Trunk Control Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-06 (Trunk Control): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 06 90-06-01 Menu 1 TRK Port back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-06-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 924 ◆ Programming Menu n − + → Enter the Menu number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 941
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-07 : Extension Control 90-07 : Extension Control Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 90-07 : Extension Control is used for the extension maintenance. Input Data Menu Number Item No. 01 1 = Hardware Reset 2 = Software Reset Item Input Data Extension Control Extension Number (up to 8 digits) Conditions This program is only available in terminal and WebPro programming.
PAGE 942
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-08 : System Reset 90-08 : System Reset Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-08 : System Reset is used to perform a UX5000 reset. Input Data Item No. 01 Item System Reset Input Data Dial 1 and HOLD (Press only HOLD key for cancel) Conditions After restoring a customer database, the UX5000 must be reset using Program 90-08 or by powering down/powering up before all the restored programming will take affect.
PAGE 943
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time 90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time to define the time the UX5000 will automatically reset. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Month 00-12 (Note 1) 00 02 Day 00-31 (Note 2) 00 03 Hour 00-23 00 04 Minute 00-59 00 Note 1. Note 2.
PAGE 944
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-09 (Automatic System Reset Time): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 09 90-09-01 SysReset Month0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-09-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 928 ◆ Programming → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 945
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-10 : System Alarm Setup 90-10 : System Alarm Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-10 : System Alarm Setup to assign a status to UX5000 alarms. You can designate an alarm as Major or Minor. This program also assigns whether or not the alarm is displayed to a key terminal and whether or not the alarm information is reported to the pre-defined destination. Input Data Alarm Number Item No.
PAGE 946
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-10 : System Alarm Setup Alarm Type Report Use to Advise Of... 3 2 (MIN) 0 Communication Error Between CPU and blade • Blade is not the correct capacity for the previously defined slot. • The power supply voltage is not within the correct range. • Power supply noise. • Noise from surrounding equipment. • Improper earth ground. Keyset Display Shows . . .
PAGE 947
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-10 : System Alarm Setup Alarm Type Report 11 0 0 CTI Link Error • Link to the CTI server removed. • Connect HUB defective. • CTI server not started correctly. Check the CTI server, wiring, and connection. 12 0 0 ACD MIS Link Error • Link with the ACD MIS client removed. • Connect HUB defective. • ACD MIS client PC not started correctly. Check the ACD MIS client PC for connection.
PAGE 948
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-10 : System Alarm Setup Alarm Type Report 29 0 0 Use to Advise Of... Keyset Display Shows . . . (SID: XX-*** MM/DD HH/MM XX = CygniLink System ID) Action Charge Management (TMR) Check the printer and PC. SID:XX-### MM/DD HH:MM Buffer Full Print, clear the data, or output The telephone call details preser• The Charge Management data to the PC. vation number remainder #### buffer is full. SID:XX-### MM/DD HH:MM The telephone call details data cannot be preserved.
PAGE 949
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-10 : System Alarm Setup Alarm Type Report Use to Advise Of... 60 2 (MIN) 0 SIP Registration Error Notification • Registration of SIP trunk to SIP server failed. • No response from the SIP server to the SIP registration request. • Router programming incorrect. • Problem connecting to LAN or network. Action • • • • • Reconfirm the programming in 10-12, 10-28, 10-29, 10-30, 10-36. Reconfirm router settings. Reconfirm network settings/operation.
PAGE 950
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-10 : System Alarm Setup Type Report 81 2 (MIN) 0 CygniLink Terminal Call Trouble Information • DSP resource not acquired. 82 2 (MIN) 0 CygniLink Virtual Slot Number of slots exceeded. Accommodation Error • Exceeded slot accommodation. • Failure in creating virtual slot. 83 2 (MIN) 0 CygniLink Communication • Error • • Checksum error occurred. • Index error occurred. • • Router setting incorrect. • LAN connection issue. • Network connection issue.
PAGE 951
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-10 : System Alarm Setup Alarm Type Report Use to Advise Of... 87 2 (MIN) 0 Daughter Board Synchroni- Confirm the LAN link zation Fails between the primary and sec• Error occurred in commu- ondary UX5000s. nication between primary and secondary UX5000s preventing replication. • LAN link between primary and secondary UX5000s disconnected. 88 2 (MIN) 0 CygniLink Operation Phase Shift (Primary) • Operation began as primary.
PAGE 952
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-10 : System Alarm Setup Use to Advise Of... Keyset Display Shows . . . (SID: XX-*** MM/DD HH/MM XX = CygniLink System ID) Alarm Type Report Action 96 1 (MAJ) 0 Database recovery failure. Repeat recovery process after • File error due to resource deleting extra files. shortage.
PAGE 953
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-11 : System Alarm Report 90-11 : System Alarm Report Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 90-11 : System Alarm Report to define the details of the UX5000 alarm report. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default - 0 0 = No report 1 = EMail Address 0 - 0 01 - Not Used - 02 Report Method When alarm reports are to be EMailed, set this option to “1”.
PAGE 954
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-11 : System Alarm Report 12 DNS Secondary Address When alarm reports are to be EMailed, set the DNS secondary address. 0.0.0.0-255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 13 Customer Name When alarm reports are to be EMailed, enter a name which will be used to identify the particular system. Up to 255 Characters No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-11 (System Alarm Setup): 1. 2.
PAGE 955
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-12 : System Alarm Output 90-12 : System Alarm Output Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 90-12 : System Alarm Output to set the options for the alarm report. This program has 6 separate menu options. Define the output port to be used as the output for UX5000 alarm report and set the UX5000 alarm options. The UX5000 can have up to 50 reports. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 956
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-12 : System Alarm Output Feature Cross Reference None Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-12 (System Alarm Output): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 12 90-12-01 Output Type back ↑ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-12-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 940 ◆ Programming 0:None ↓ select → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 957
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-13 : System Information Output 90-13 : System Information Output Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-13 : System Information Output to define the output port to be used as the system information output. The baud rate for the COM port should be set in Program 10-21-02. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Output Port Type Indicate the type of connection used to print the system information.
PAGE 958
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-13 : System Information Output Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-13 (System Information Output): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 13 90-13-01 Output Type back ↑ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-13-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 942 ◆ Programming 0:None ↓ select → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. When outputting the data (item 3), press 1 then press HOLD to print. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 959
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-16 : Main Software Information 90-16 : Main Software Information Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-16 : Main Software Information to display the main software information on the CCPU. This information can also be viewed outside of UX5000 programming by pressing CHECK and then the HOLD key on any display keyset. Input Data Item No. Item Data Component 01 Version Number 01.00~99.
PAGE 960
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-17 : Firmware Information 90-17 : Firmware Information Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-17 : Firmware Information to display the firmware information on the CPU and other blades. Input Data Item No. Item 01 DSP Firmware Version Number 09 CS Firmware Version Number Data Component 00.00.00.00 - 15.15.15.15 BCD Code (2 Byte) 00.00 - FF.
PAGE 961
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-19 : Dial Block Release 90-19 : Dial Block Release Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description When the extension number is entered in Program 90-19 : Dial Block Release, the extension will be released from the Dial Block restriction. Input Data Extension Number Item No.
PAGE 962
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup 90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup to define the details of the traffic report. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 963
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup 10 - Not Currently Available Base Station All Busy Output 0 = Not detected 1-256 (Report when the data is reached to the defined value) 0 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ● Traffic Management Reporting (TMS) Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-20 (Traffic Report Data Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 20 90-20-01 Call Traffic back ↑ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
PAGE 964
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-21 : Traffic Report Output 90-21 : Traffic Report Output Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-21 : Traffic Report Output to define the output port to be used as the traffic report output. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 965
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-22 : NGT Terminal Version Information 90-22 : NGT Terminal Version Information Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 90-22 : NGT Terminal Version information to define the hardware and firmware version of the NGT terminal. Input Data Terminal Type Item No.
PAGE 966
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-22 : NGT Terminal Version Information Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-22 (NGT Terminal Version Information): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 22 90-22-01 Tel kind 1 Hardware Ver. 0 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-22-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 950 ◆ Programming Tel kind n − + → Enter the Terminal Type/Kind number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 967
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Terminals 90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Terminals Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Terminals to delete the registered IP terminal from the UX5000. Input Data Extension Number Item No.
PAGE 968
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup 90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup to set up when the alarm report will print. Input Data Notification Number Item No.
PAGE 969
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-24 (System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 24 90-24-01 Noti1 Month 0 back ↑ ↓ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-24-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. select Notin − + → Enter the Terminal Type/Kind number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 970
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup 90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup to define the mail address to receive the UX5000 alarm report CC Mail setup. Input Data CC Number Item No.
PAGE 971
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-26 : Program Access Level Setup 90-26 : Program Access Level Setup Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 90-26 : Program Access Level Setup to define the password access level required to change a UX5000 program. Input Data Program Numbers Item No.
PAGE 972
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-26 : Program Access Level Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-26 (Program Access Level Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 26 90-26-01 PRG No. 1001 Maintenance Level 3:SA ← 3. −1 +1 → Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-25-nn PRG No. nnnn Maintenance Level n:xx ← 4. 5. 6. 956 ◆ Programming − + → Enter the program number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 973
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-28 : UserPro Password Setup 90-28 : UserPro Password Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-28 : UserPro Password Setup to set the password for each extension number, as required, for the UB level (access only to the logged on extension user’s programs). Input Data Extension Number Max. 8 digits Item No.
PAGE 974
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-31 : DIM Over Ethernet 90-31 : DIM Over Ethernet Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-31 : DIM Over Ethernet to define the setup used for DIM access over an ethernet connection. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data Default 01 Enable Access Enable (1) or disable (0) the UX5000’s ability to allow DIM access via an ethernet connection.
PAGE 975
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-31 : DIM Over Ethernet Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-31 (DIM Over Ethernet): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 31 90-31-01 ACCESS ENABLE 0:Disable ← 3. −1 → Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-31-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. +1 → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 976
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-34 : Firmware Information 90-34 : Firmware Information Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-34 : Firmware Information to check the firmware information for each installed blade in the UX5000. Input Data Slot Number Item No. Item 01-24 Display Data Data Format 01 Blade Name Blade Name - 02 Firmware Version Number 00.00 ~ 15.
PAGE 977
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup 90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup to set the access level when using the Wizard for programming. Input Data Wizard Number Item No.
PAGE 978
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-35 (Wizard Programming Level Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 35 90-35-01 Wizard No. 1 Maintenance Level0:All|1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-35-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 962 ◆ Programming −1 Wizard No. n +1 → Enter the Wizard number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 979
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting 90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting Level: Feature Availability • IN Available - requires a MEMDB. This program is view only. To define the settings for this option, PCPro must be used to convert the firmware file (TOOLS-CREATE F/W PACKAGE) and to define the options (COMMUNICATIONS/FIRMWARE UPDATE). Description Use Program 90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting to display the update time for firmware updates for MAIN.BIN, DSPDBU.
PAGE 980
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting Feature Cross Reference Maintenance Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-36 (Firmware Update Time Setting): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 36 90-36-01 Year back ↑ 3. ← 964 ◆ Programming 0 select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-36-nn nnnnn 4. 5. ↓ −1 +1 → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program.
PAGE 981
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-38 : UserPro Data Level Setup 90-38 : UserPro Data Level Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-38 : UserPro Data Level Setup to enable or disable the following items which are available for the UserPro feature when logging on with the UA and UB modes. This option will allow (1) or deny (0) a user’s access to the program. An extension’s Class of Service settings will override program access to these options.
PAGE 982
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-38 : UserPro Data Level Setup 18 Call Forward - Immediate/No Answer/Both Ring 11-11-01, 11-11-03, 11-11-05 11-11-02 UA/ UB 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 1 (Enabled) 19 Call Forward - Busy UA/ UB 1 (Enabled) 11-11-20 15-02-02 11-11-20 15-02-03 15-02-01 UA/ UB Toll Restriction Override Password Setup 21-07 UA/ UB 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 20 Trunk Ring Tones 21 Extension Rin
PAGE 983
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-38 : UserPro Data Level Setup Feature Cross Reference Maintenance, UserPro Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-38 (UserPro Data Level Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 38 90-38-01 Time Setting back ↑ 3. 1:On select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-38-01 Time Setting ← 4. 5. ↓ −1 +1 1:On → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 984
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-39 : Virtual Loopback Port Reset 90-39 : Virtual Loopback Port Reset Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-39 : Virtual Loopback Port Reset when it is necessary to reset all of the Virtual Loop Back ports. All connected calls will be dropped when this program is executed. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 985
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-39 : Virtual Loopback Port Reset Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-39 (Virtual Loopback Port Reset): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 39 90-39-01 VLP-Reset YES:1 back ↑ ↓ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-39-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. select → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 986
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-41 : Server Settings to Update Terminal Local Data 90-41 : Server Settings to Update Terminal Local Data Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-41 : Server Settings to Update Terminal Local Data to define the server information for updating the local data on the terminals.
PAGE 987
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-41 : Server Settings to Update Terminal Local Data Feature Cross Reference None Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-41 (Server Settings to Update Terminal Local Data): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 41 90-41-01 Server Info1 Server add type 0:IPv4 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-41-01 nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6.
PAGE 988
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-42 : DT700 Terminal Version Information 90-42 : DT700 Terminal Version Information Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-42 : DT700 Terminal Version Information to set the hardware version and firmware version of DT700 terminal. Input Data Terminal Type Item No. Item 1 = IP3NA-*TIXH/TIH(*:2 or 6) 2 = IP3NA-*TIXH(*:8 ,12 or 24) 3 = IP3NA-320TISXH Input Data Default 01 Software Version 00.00.00.00 ~ FF.FF.FF.FF 00.00.00.
PAGE 989
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-42 : DT700 Terminal Version Information Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-42 (DT700 Terminal Version Information): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 42 90-42-01 Term Type1 Software Ver 00.00.00.00 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-42-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Term Type1 → Enter the Terminal Type number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 990
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DT700 90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DT700 Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-43 : Deleting Terminal License DT700 to delete the terminal license information delivered to the DT700 terminal Input Data Extension Number Item No.
PAGE 991
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DT700 Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-43 (Deleting Terminal License of DT700): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 43 90-43-01 TEL301 Delete?(1:Yes) back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-43-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. TELnnn → Enter the extension number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 992
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface 90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface to delete the terminal license information delivered to terminals with TCP interface. Input Data License Delete Code Item No.
PAGE 993
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-44 (Deleting Terminal License of TCP I/F): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 44 90-44-01 License Code back ↑ 3. select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-44-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. ↓ → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 994
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-45 : Temporary Password Change for DT700 Terminal 90-45 : Temporary Password Change for DT700 Terminal Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-45 : Temporaty Password Change for DT700 Terminal to change the Temporary Password used by the DT700 encryption function. Input Data Item No. Item 01 Temporary Password Change Request Change the Temporary Password for the encryption with WebPro/PCPro.
PAGE 995
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-48 : Button Kit Information of Multi-Line Terminal 90-48 : Button Kit Information of Multi-Line Terminal Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 90-48 : Button Kit Information of Multi-Line Terminal to define the type of button kit used on a UX5000 keyset. Input Data Extension Number Up to 8 digits Item No.
PAGE 996
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-48 : Button Kit Information of Multi-Line Terminal Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-48 (Button Kit Information of Multi-Line Terminal): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 48 90-48-01 TEL301 Btn Kit0 :No Setting |1 back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-48-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 980 ◆ Programming TELnnn − + → Enter the extension number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 997
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-49 : Protection Mode Setup for Multi-Line Terminal 90-49 : Protection Mode Setup for Multi-Line Terminal Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 90-49 : Protection Mode Setup for Multi-Line Terminal to set up the protection mode of each multi-line (IP) terminal. Input Data Extension Number Up to 8 digits Item No. Item 01 Release Protection Mode If required, release the protection state of an UX5000 IP terminal.
PAGE 998
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-49 : Protection Mode Setup for Multi-Line Terminal Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-49 (Protection Mode Setup for Multi-Line Terminal): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 49 90-49-01 TEL301 Release? (1:Yes) back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-49-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. 982 ◆ Programming TEL301 → Enter the terminal number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 999
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup 90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup to define the extension number to display any UX5000 alarms. Input Data System ID Number Item No. 01 01-50 Item System Alarm Display Terminal Define the extension number to display any UX5000 alarms.
PAGE 1000
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange 90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange to define the exchange date for parts which may need to be replaced after their expected life-span. Input Data System ID 00-50 Index Number 01-10 Item No.
PAGE 1001
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-51 (Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 51 90-51-01 Index 1 Display Power battery back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-51-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. 6. Index 1 → Enter the Index number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 1002
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-52 : System Alarm Output 90-52 : System Alarm Output Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-52 : System Alarm Output to perform an output/save of the alarm information. Input Data Item No. Item 01 Save All Alarm Reports 02 Save New Alarm Reports Input Data Default Print All? (Yes: 1) - Print New? (Yes: 1) - Conditions When “4-CTA/CTU” is set in Program 90-12-01, the entry in “Destination System Number” is ignored.
PAGE 1003
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-53 : Clear System Alarm Reports 90-53 : Clear System Alarm Reports Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-53 : Clear System Alarm Reports to clear information from the UX5000 alarm reports. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 1004
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-55 : Free License Activation 90-55 : Free License Activation Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-55 : Free License Activation to activate a free license. Input Data Item No. 01 Item Free License Activation Input Data Default 0 = Stop 1 = Start - Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Maintenance Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-55 (Free License Activation): 1. 2.
PAGE 1005
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-56 : NTP Setup 90-56 : NTP Setup Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 90-56 : NTP Setup to define NTP settngs. Input Data Item No. Item 01 NTP Synchronize 02 Server Address Input Data Default 0 = No 1 = Yes 0 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx No Entry Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Maintenance Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-56 (NTP Setup): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode.
PAGE 1006
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-57 : Backup Recovery Data 90-57 : Backup Recovery Data Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 90-57 : Backup Recovery Data to back up the UX5000 data file preserved in the flash memory on the CCPU to be used in a recovery process if needed. Up to five recovery files can be preserved in the flash memory on the CCPU. Input Data Data ID Item No.
PAGE 1007
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-57 : Backup Recovery Data Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-57 (Backup Recovery Data): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 57 90-57-01 back 3. ↑ ↓ select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-57-01 ← 4. 5. − + → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number. OR Press MIC until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.
PAGE 1008
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-58 : Restore Recovery Data 90-58 : Restore Recovery Data Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 90-58 : Restore Recovery Data to restore the UX5000 data from a file preserved in the flash memory on the CCPU (saved in Program 90-57). After executing the command, the UX5000 restarts automatically. Input Data Data ID Item No.
PAGE 1009
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-58 : Restore Recovery Data Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-58 (Restore Recovery Data): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 58 90-58-01 back 3. ↑ ↓ select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-58-01 ← 4. 5. − + → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number. OR Press MIC until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.
PAGE 1010
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-59 : Delete Recovery Data 90-59 : Delete Recovery Data Level: Feature Availability SA • Available. Description Use Program 90-59 : Delete Recovery Data to delete the stored UX5000 data file preserved in the flash memory on the CCPU (saved in Program 90-57) used in a recovery process. Input Data Data ID Item No.
PAGE 1011
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information 90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information to display the layer status information for the T1/PRI/BRI blades. This program is view-only. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 1012
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-60 (T1/ISDN Layer Status Information): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 60 90-60-01 Slot No Link Status n/a ← 3. ← 996 ◆ Programming → Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-60-nn nnnnn 4. 5. 6. 1 Slot No n → Enter the slot number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. View the data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 1013
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-61 : Manual Slot Installation 90-61 : Manual Slot Installation Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 90-61 : Manual Slot Installation to manually install blades. If other blades have previously been assigned, it must first be deleted before this program can be used. Input Data System ID 00-50 Slot Number 01-24 Item No.
PAGE 1014
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-61 : Manual Slot Installation Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-61 (Manual Slot Installation): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 61 90-61-01 Slot No. Installation ← 3. −1 ← 998 ◆ Programming → Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-61-nn nnnnn 4. 5. 6. +1 1 Slot No. 1 → Enter the slot number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 1015
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-62 : Security ID Information 90-62 : Security ID Information Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 90-62 : Security ID Information to display information on the security ID of the CCPU. This program is view-only. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 1016
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 90-62 : Security ID Information Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90-62 (Security ID Information): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 90 62 90-62-01 back 3. ← 1000 ◆ Programming ↓ select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 90-62-nn nnnnn 4. 5. ↑ → View the data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 1017
Program 92 : Copy Program 92-01 : Copy by Extension Number Program 92 : Copy Program 92-01 : Copy by Extension Number Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 92-01 : Copy by Extension Number to copy the data for one program to another keyset, trunk, group, etc. Refer to the following charts to see which programs can be copied. Input Data Program Number Item No. 01 XX-XX Item Input Data Source Number Enter the extension, trunk, group, etc.
PAGE 1018
Program 92 : Copy Program 92-01 : Copy by Extension Number Note: Copy Program is applicable only for the following programs. Trunk Port Base Program No.
PAGE 1019
Program 92 : Copy Program 92-01 : Copy by Extension Number Extension Base (Refer to Program 92-03-01 to copy these programs by port number.) Program No.
PAGE 1020
Program 92 : Copy Program 92-01 : Copy by Extension Number Department Group Base Program No. Program Name 16-01 Department (Extension) Group Basic Data Setup 35-04 SMDR Port Assignment for Department Group Note Copy all data except Group Name (Item 01). (16-01-01) DSS Console Base Program No. Program Name 30-01 DSS Console Operation Mode 30-03 DSS Key Assignment Note Intercom Base Program No.
PAGE 1021
Program 92 : Copy Program 92-01 : Copy by Extension Number Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 92-01 (Copy by Extension Number): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 92 01 92-01-01 Copy Function back ↑ ↓ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 92-01-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. select → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 1022
Program 92 : Copy Program 92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers 92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers to delete all extension numbers as defined in Programs 11-01 and 11-04. However , the extension number of first the port will not deleted to allow for terminal program access. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 1023
Program 92 : Copy Program 92-03 : Copy by Port Number 92-03 : Copy by Port Number Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 92-03 : Copy by Port Number to copy the data for a keyset to another keyset based on the port number. Refer to the following chart to see which programs which can be copied. Copy Program is applicable only for the following programs. (Refer to Program 92-01-01 to copy these programs by extension number.) Program No.
PAGE 1024
Program 92 : Copy Program 92-03 : Copy by Port Number Input Data Item No. Item Input Data 01 Copy Function Enter the program from which the data will be copied. 4-Digit Program Number (ex: 15-07 = 1507) Copy Source Enter the extension port number from which the information is to be copied. Extension Number (max. 8 digits) Copy Start Enter the first extension port number to which the information is to be copied. Extension Number (max.
PAGE 1025
Program 92 : Copy Program 92-03 : Copy by Port Number Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 92-03 (Copy by Port Number Program): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 92 03 92-03-01 Copy Function back ↑ ↓ 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 92-03-nn nnnnn ← 4. 5. select → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Enter data for the next item in the program. OR Press MIC once to enter a new item number.
PAGE 1026
Program 92 : Copy Program 92-04 : Extension Data Swap 92-04 : Extension Data Swap Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 92-04 : Extension Data Swap to swap an extension’s programming to another extension number. The following extension-based programs will be swapped: Program No.
PAGE 1027
Program 92 : Copy Program 92-04 : Extension Data Swap 21-18 IP Trunk Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions 21-19 IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions 21-20 SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extensions 22-04 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment 22-06 Normal Incoming Ring Mode 23-02 Call Pickup Group 23-03 Ringing Line Preference 23-04 Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions 24-03 Park Group Assignment 24-06 Fixed Call Forwarding 24-07 Fixed Call Forw
PAGE 1028
Program 92 : Copy Program 92-04 : Extension Data Swap Conditions ● ● ● ● ● Any user-defined programming stored in the SRAM will not be swapped (for example, Call Forward set up, Selectable Display Messaging, etc.). The extensions to be swapped must be idle while the swap is performed, or an "Invalid" error message will be received. Data for virtual extension’s cannot be swapped. When a swap is performed, the following actions are executed for the swapped extensions.
PAGE 1029
Program 92 : Copy Program 92-05 : Data Swap Password 92-05 : Data Swap Password Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 92-05 : Data Swap Password to define the password to be used by each extension when using the Extension Data Swap feature using a service code. Input Data Item No.
PAGE 1030
Program 92 : Copy Program 92-05 : Data Swap Password Program No.
PAGE 1031
Program 92 : Copy Program 92-05 : Data Swap Password Feature Cross Reference ● Maintenance Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 92-05 (Data Swap Password): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 92 05 92-05-01 TEL301 Password back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 92-05-xx xxxxx ← 4. 5. 6. TELnnn − + → Enter the extension number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
PAGE 1032
Program 92 : Copy Program 92-06 : Fill Extension Data 92-06 : Fill Extension Data Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 92-06 : Fill Extension Data to fill program entries for a range of extensions to the same as a designated source extension. In addition, program data can be deleted for a range of ports (see Program 92-07). Input Data Item No. Item Input Data 01 Fill Extension Data Enter the 4-digit program number you would like to fill.
PAGE 1033
Program 92 : Copy Program 92-06 : Fill Extension Data Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 92-06 (Fill Extension Data): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 92 06 92-06Fill Function back ↑ 3. ↓ Enter the number of the item you want to program. 92-06-01 Fill Function ← 4. → Enter the 4-digit program number you would like to fill (xxxx). 92-06-01 Fill Function xxxx ← 5. ← ← → nnn → Enter the last extension number to be filled + HOLD. 92-06-01 Fill End ← 8.
PAGE 1034
Program 92 : Copy Program 92-07 : Delete Port Data 92-07 : Delete Port Data Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 92-07 : Delete Port Data to delete data for a range of ports. Input Data Item No. Item Input Data 01 Delete Port Data Enter the 4-digit program number you would like to delete. For example, Program 11-02 would be entered as "1102". Enter the first port number to be deleted and press HOLD. Enter the last port number to be deleted and press HOLD.
PAGE 1035
Program 92 : Copy Program 92-07 : Delete Port Data Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 92-07 (Delete Port Data): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 92 07 92-07- 01 Del. Function back ↑ 3. ↓ Enter the number of the item you want to program. 92-07-01 Del. Function ← 4. → Enter the 4-digit program number you would like to delete (xxxx). 92-07-01 Del. Function xxxx ← 5. ← nnn → Enter the last port number to be deleted + HOLD. 92-07-01 Del. End ← 7.
PAGE 1036
Program 92 : Copy Program 92-07 : Delete Port Data - For Your Notes - 1020 ◆ Programming UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 1037
Program 99 : Manufacturer Options 99-01 : MF Options Program 99 : Manufacturer Options 99-01 : MF Options Level: IN Feature Availability • Available. Description Use Program 99-01 : MF Options to adjust certain UX5000 functions. These programs should be left at default, when possible. Input Data Item No. 16 Item System Clock Adjustment Automatically adjust the UX5000 clock forward or backward at every midnight.
PAGE 1038
Program 99 : Manufacturer Options 99-01 : MF Options 56 Terminal Pro Operation Mode Setting This option is used to change the operational mode of terminal programming (key operation and cursor initial position) to the UX5000 mode (MIC key used to exit program option and cursor on first line) or to change to the Aspire mode (MSG key used to exit program option and cursor on second line).
PAGE 1039
Program 99 : Manufacturer Options 99-01 : MF Options Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 99-01 (MF Options): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 99 01 99-01-01 Option1 back ↑ 3. select Enter the number of the item you want to program. 99-01-xx Optionxx ← 4. 5. ↓ → Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD. Press MIC once to enter a new item number. OR Press MIC until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.
PAGE 1040
Program 99 : Manufacturer Options 99-02 : Nondisclosure Options Firmware Download 99-02 : Nondisclosure Options Firmware Download Level: Feature Availability IN • Available. Description Use Program 99-02 : Nondisclosure Options Firmware Download to downgrade a particular blade’s firmware. This option is only available through terminal programming. It is only recommended to downgrade firmware when advised by NEC’s Technical Service department.
PAGE 1041
Program 99 : Manufacturer Options 99-02 : Nondisclosure Options Firmware Download Item No. Item 01 Firmware Download Mode If “Normal” is selected, when there are two or more files, the most recent file is downloaded. If firmware needs to be downgraded, select “1” and define the version in Program 99-02-02. 02 Firmware Version The data in this option is referred to when 99-02-01 is set to 1. The UX5000 then uses the data in this option to determine the firmware version to be used for downgrading.
PAGE 1042
Program 99 : Manufacturer Options 99-02 : Nondisclosure Options Firmware Download Terminal Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 99-02 (Nondisclosure Options Firmware Download): 1. 2. Enter the programming mode. 99 02 99-02-01 Package Type0 F/W DL Mode 0:Normal back ↑ ↓ select 3. Enter the number of the item you want to program. 99-02-xx F/W DL Mode ← 4. 5. 6. 1026 ◆ Programming → Enter the Package Type number to be defined or press FLASH to use the displayed entry.
PAGE 1043
Index A R Audible Ringing, CO . . .409 Ringing, CO . C . .409 S Capacities/System Number Plan . . .7 Charts Class of Service Option (Administrator Level) . . .305 Soft Key Display Prompts While Programming . System Number Plan/Capacities . . .7 System Passwords . . .12 . .6 Class of Service Option (Answer Service) . . .313 Class of Service Option (DISA/E&M Service) . . .324 Class of Service Option (Hold/Transfer Service) . . .315 Class of Service Option (Incoming Call Service) . . .
PAGE 1044
Index ii ◆ Index UX5000 Software Program Manual
PAGE 1045
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. 4 Forest Parkway Shelton, CT 06484 www.necux5000.com Important Telephone Numbers Sales Support and General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800-365-1928 Technical Service Current Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203-925-8801 Current Products After Hours (Emergencies Only) . . . . . 203-929-7920 Discontinued Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1046
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. 4 Forest Parkway Shelton, CT 06484 www.necux5000.com (See inside back cover for contact information.) (0913202) May 16, 2008, Rev 3 Printed in U.S.A.